HP Hewlett Packard Switch BMD00022 User Manual
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch  
Command Reference Guide  
2350 Mission College Blvd.  
Suite 600  
Part number BMD00022  
January 2008  
Santa Clara, CA 95054  
www.bladenetwork.net  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Command line interface..........................................................................................................................8  
Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 8  
Additional references ............................................................................................................................... 8  
Connecting to the switch........................................................................................................................... 8  
Establishing a console connection ......................................................................................................... 9  
Setting an IP address........................................................................................................................... 9  
Establishing a Telnet connection.......................................................................................................... 10  
Establishing an SSH connection .......................................................................................................... 10  
Accessing the switch .............................................................................................................................. 11  
Idle timeout ........................................................................................................................................... 12  
Typographical conventions...................................................................................................................... 13  
Menu basics........................................................................................................................................14  
Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 14  
Main Menu........................................................................................................................................... 14  
Menu summary...................................................................................................................................... 14  
Global commands.................................................................................................................................. 15  
Command line history and editing............................................................................................................ 17  
Command line interface shortcuts............................................................................................................. 18  
Command stacking ........................................................................................................................... 18  
Command abbreviation ..................................................................................................................... 18  
Tab completion................................................................................................................................. 18  
First-time configuration..........................................................................................................................19  
Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 19  
Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol support ................................................................... 20  
Setting passwords.................................................................................................................................. 20  
Changing the default administrator password....................................................................................... 20  
Changing the default user password.................................................................................................... 22  
Changing the default operator password ............................................................................................. 22  
Information Menu.................................................................................................................................24  
Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 24  
Menu overview...................................................................................................................................... 24  
System Information Menu........................................................................................................................ 25  
SNMPv3 Information Menu ................................................................................................................ 26  
SNMPv3 dump................................................................................................................................. 32  
System information............................................................................................................................ 33  
Show last 100 syslog messages.......................................................................................................... 34  
System user information ..................................................................................................................... 35  
Layer 2 information................................................................................................................................ 36  
FDB information menu ....................................................................................................................... 37  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol information ...................................................................................... 38  
Hot Links Trigger information .............................................................................................................. 39  
802.1X information........................................................................................................................... 40  
Spanning Tree information ................................................................................................................. 42  
Rapid Spanning Tree / Multiple Spanning Tree information.................................................................... 44  
Common Internal Spanning Tree information ........................................................................................ 46  
Trunk group information..................................................................................................................... 48  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VLAN information ............................................................................................................................. 48  
Fast Uplink Convergence status........................................................................................................... 49  
Layer 3 information................................................................................................................................ 50  
Route information.............................................................................................................................. 51  
Show all IP Route information ............................................................................................................. 51  
ARP information................................................................................................................................ 53  
OSPF information.............................................................................................................................. 54  
Routing Information Protocol information .............................................................................................. 58  
IP information ................................................................................................................................... 59  
IGMP multicast group information ....................................................................................................... 60  
VRRP information .............................................................................................................................. 62  
Server Mobility Port information.......................................................................................................... 63  
QoS information.................................................................................................................................... 64  
802.1p information........................................................................................................................... 64  
ACL information..................................................................................................................................... 65  
RMON Information Menu ....................................................................................................................... 66  
RMON history information ................................................................................................................. 66  
RMON alarm information .................................................................................................................. 67  
RMON event information................................................................................................................... 68  
Link status information ............................................................................................................................ 69  
Port information ..................................................................................................................................... 70  
Transceiver status................................................................................................................................... 70  
Uplink Failure Detection information ......................................................................................................... 71  
Information dump................................................................................................................................... 71  
Statistics Menu.....................................................................................................................................72  
Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 72  
Menu information .................................................................................................................................. 72  
Port Statistics Menu ................................................................................................................................ 73  
802.1X statistics ............................................................................................................................... 74  
Bridging statistics .............................................................................................................................. 76  
Ethernet statistics............................................................................................................................... 77  
Interface statistics.............................................................................................................................. 79  
Internet Protocol (IP) statistics .............................................................................................................. 81  
Link statistics..................................................................................................................................... 81  
Port RMON statistics.......................................................................................................................... 82  
Layer 2 statistics..................................................................................................................................... 84  
FDB statistics .................................................................................................................................... 84  
LACP statistics................................................................................................................................... 84  
Hot Links statistics.............................................................................................................................. 85  
Layer 3 statistics..................................................................................................................................... 86  
GEA Layer 3 statistics menu ............................................................................................................... 87  
IP statistics........................................................................................................................................ 88  
ARP statistics .................................................................................................................................... 89  
DNS statistics ................................................................................................................................... 89  
ICMP statistics .................................................................................................................................. 90  
TCP statistics..................................................................................................................................... 91  
UDP statistics.................................................................................................................................... 93  
IGMP Multicast Group statistics........................................................................................................... 93  
OSPF statistics menu.......................................................................................................................... 94  
VRRP statistics................................................................................................................................... 98  
RIP statistics...................................................................................................................................... 99  
Management Processor statistics ............................................................................................................ 100  
Packet statistics............................................................................................................................... 100  
Contents  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TCP statistics................................................................................................................................... 101  
UDP statistics.................................................................................................................................. 101  
CPU statistics.................................................................................................................................. 102  
Access Control List (ACL) statistics menu.................................................................................................. 102  
ACL statistics .................................................................................................................................. 102  
SNMP statistics.................................................................................................................................... 103  
NTP statistics ....................................................................................................................................... 105  
Uplink Failure Detection statistics............................................................................................................ 106  
Statistics dump..................................................................................................................................... 107  
Configuration Menu ...........................................................................................................................108  
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 108  
Menu information ................................................................................................................................ 108  
Viewing, applying, reverting, and saving changes ................................................................................... 109  
Viewing pending changes..................................................................................................................... 109  
Applying pending changes ................................................................................................................... 109  
Reverting changes................................................................................................................................ 109  
Saving the configuration ....................................................................................................................... 110  
Reminders........................................................................................................................................... 110  
System configuration ............................................................................................................................ 111  
System host log configuration ........................................................................................................... 112  
Secure Shell Server configuration...................................................................................................... 114  
RADIUS server configuration............................................................................................................. 115  
TACACS+ server configuration ......................................................................................................... 116  
NTP server configuration.................................................................................................................. 118  
System SNMP configuration ............................................................................................................. 119  
SNMPv3 configuration .................................................................................................................... 120  
System Access configuration............................................................................................................. 127  
Port configuration................................................................................................................................. 131  
Temporarily disabling a port ............................................................................................................ 132  
Port link configuration...................................................................................................................... 132  
Port ACL/QoS configuration............................................................................................................. 133  
Port PVRST configuration.................................................................................................................. 134  
Layer 2 configuration ........................................................................................................................... 135  
802.1X configuration ...................................................................................................................... 136  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/ Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configuration........................................ 140  
Common Internal Spanning Tree configuration.................................................................................... 141  
Spanning Tree configuration............................................................................................................. 144  
Forwarding Database configuration .................................................................................................. 148  
Static FDB configuration................................................................................................................... 148  
Trunk configuration ......................................................................................................................... 149  
IP Trunk Hash configuration.............................................................................................................. 150  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol configuration.................................................................................. 151  
VLAN configuration......................................................................................................................... 152  
Protocol VLAN configuration............................................................................................................. 153  
Private VLAN configuration .............................................................................................................. 154  
Hot Links configuration .................................................................................................................... 155  
Layer 3 configuration ........................................................................................................................... 158  
IP interface configuration ................................................................................................................. 159  
Default Gateway configuration ......................................................................................................... 160  
IP Static Route configuration ............................................................................................................. 161  
Address Resolution Protocol configuration .......................................................................................... 161  
Static ARP configuration................................................................................................................... 162  
IP Forwarding configuration ............................................................................................................. 162  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Filter configuration ............................................................................................................. 163  
Route Map configuration.................................................................................................................. 163  
IP Access List configuration............................................................................................................... 164  
Routing Information Protocol configuration.......................................................................................... 165  
Open Shortest Path First configuration ............................................................................................... 168  
OSPF Interface configuration ............................................................................................................ 170  
IGMP configuration......................................................................................................................... 175  
Domain Name System configuration.................................................................................................. 180  
Bootstrap Protocol Relay configuration............................................................................................... 180  
Server Mobility configuration............................................................................................................ 181  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration................................................................................ 183  
Quality of Service configuration............................................................................................................. 190  
QoS 802.1p configuration............................................................................................................... 190  
Access Control configuration................................................................................................................. 191  
Access Control List configuration....................................................................................................... 191  
ACL Ethernet Filter configuration ....................................................................................................... 192  
ACL IP Version 4 Filter configuration.................................................................................................. 193  
ACL TCP/UDP Filter configuration ..................................................................................................... 194  
ACL Meter configuration.................................................................................................................. 195  
ACL Re-mark configuration ............................................................................................................... 195  
ACL Packet Format configuration....................................................................................................... 197  
ACL Group configuration................................................................................................................. 198  
Remote Monitoring configuration ........................................................................................................... 199  
RMON history configuration............................................................................................................. 199  
RMON event configuration .............................................................................................................. 200  
RMON alarm configuration.............................................................................................................. 201  
Port mirroring ...................................................................................................................................... 202  
Port-based port mirroring ................................................................................................................. 203  
Uplink Failure Detection configuration..................................................................................................... 204  
Failure Detection Pair configuration ................................................................................................... 204  
Link to Monitor configuration ............................................................................................................ 205  
Link to Disable configuration............................................................................................................. 206  
Dump................................................................................................................................................. 207  
Saving the active switch configuration .................................................................................................... 207  
Restoring the active switch configuration................................................................................................. 207  
Operations Menu...............................................................................................................................208  
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 208  
Menu information ................................................................................................................................ 208  
Operations-level port options............................................................................................................ 208  
Operations-level port 802.1X options ................................................................................................ 209  
Operations-level VRRP options .......................................................................................................... 210  
Boot Options Menu ............................................................................................................................211  
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 211  
Menu information ................................................................................................................................ 211  
Updating the switch software image....................................................................................................... 211  
Downloading new software to the switch ........................................................................................... 211  
Selecting a software image to run .......................................................................................................... 213  
Uploading a software image from the switch........................................................................................... 213  
Selecting a configuration block.............................................................................................................. 214  
Resetting the switch .............................................................................................................................. 214  
Accessing the ISCLI .............................................................................................................................. 215  
Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................................216  
Contents  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 216  
Menu information ................................................................................................................................ 216  
System maintenance options............................................................................................................. 217  
Forwarding Database options........................................................................................................... 218  
Debugging options.......................................................................................................................... 218  
ARP cache options .......................................................................................................................... 219  
IP Route Manipulation options........................................................................................................... 220  
IGMP Multicast Group options.......................................................................................................... 220  
IGMP Snooping options................................................................................................................... 221  
IGMP Mrouter options ..................................................................................................................... 221  
Uuencode flash dump...................................................................................................................... 222  
FTP/TFTP system dump put ............................................................................................................... 222  
Clearing dump information............................................................................................................... 222  
Panic command.............................................................................................................................. 223  
Unscheduled system dumps................................................................................................................... 223  
Index ................................................................................................................................................224  
Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command line interface  
Introduction  
The HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box.  
Some of the more advanced features, however, require some administrative configuration before they  
can be used effectively. This guide provides a command reference for the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c  
Switch.  
The extensive switching software included in the switch provides a variety of options for accessing  
and configuring the switch:  
•
•
•
Built-in, text-based command line interfaces (AOS CLI and ISCLI) for access via a local terminal  
or remote Telnet/Secure Shell (SSH) session  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support for access through network management  
software such as HP Systems Insight Manager  
A browser-based management interface for interactive network access through the Web browser  
The command line interface provides a direct method for collecting switch information and performing  
switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, you can view information and statistics about the switch,  
and perform any necessary configuration.  
This chapter explains how to access the AOS CLI to the switch.  
Additional references  
Additional information about installing and configuring the switch is available in the following guides:  
•
•
•
•
•
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch User Guide  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch BladeSystem ISCLI Reference  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application Guide  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Browser-based Interface Reference  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Quick Setup Instructions  
Connecting to the switch  
You can access the command line interface in one of the following ways:  
•
•
•
Using a console connection via the console port  
Using a Telnet connection over the network  
Using a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to securely log in over a network  
Command line interface  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Establishing a console connection  
To establish a console connection with the switch, you need:  
•
•
A null modem cable with a female DB-9 connector (See the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch User  
Guide for more information.)  
An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters  
shown in the table below  
Table 1 Console configuration parameters  
Parameter  
Baud Rate  
Data Bits  
Parity  
Value  
9600  
8
None  
1
Stop Bits  
Flow Control  
None  
To establish a console connection with the switch:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Connect the terminal to the console port using the null modem cable.  
Power on the terminal.  
Press the Enter key a few times on the terminal to establish the connection.  
You will be required to enter a password for access to the switch. (For more information, see the  
“Setting passwords” section in the “First-time configuration” chapter.)  
Setting an IP address  
To access the switch via a Telnet or an SSH connection, you need to have an Internet Protocol (IP)  
address set for the switch. The switch can get its IP address in one of the following ways:  
•
Management port access:  
○ Using a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server—When the /cfg/sys/dhcp  
command is enabled, the management interface (interface 250) requests its IP address from  
a DHCP server. The default value for the /cfg/sys/dhcpcommand is enabled.  
○ Configuring manually—If the network does not support DHCP, you must configure the  
management interface (interface 250) with an IP address. If you want to access the switch  
from a remote network, you also must configure the management gateway (gateway 254).  
•
Uplink port access:  
○ Using a Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server—By default, the management interface is set up  
to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. If you have a BOOTP server on the network,  
add the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file  
located on the BOOTP server. The MAC address can be found in the System Information  
menu. (See the “System information” section in the “Information Menu” chapter.) If you are  
using a DHCP server that also does BOOTP, you do not have to configure the MAC address.  
○ Configuring manually—If the network does not support BOOTP, you must configure the  
management port with an IP address.  
Command line interface  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Establishing a Telnet connection  
A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to  
the network. Telnet provides the same options for user, operator, and administrator access as those  
available through the console port. By default, Telnet is enabled on the switch. The switch supports  
four concurrent Telnet connections.  
Once the IP parameters are configured, you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. To  
establish a Telnet connection with the switch, run the Telnet program on the workstation and enter the  
telnetcommand, followed by the switch IP address:  
telnet <10GbE switch IP address>  
You will then be prompted to enter a password. The password entered determines the access level:  
administrator, operator, or user. See the “Accessing the switch” section later in this chapter for  
description of default passwords.  
Establishing an SSH connection  
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a switch via Telnet, this  
method does not provide a secure connection. The Secure Shell (SSH) protocol enables you to  
securely log into the switch over the network.  
As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent  
over the network is encrypted and secure. In order to use SSH, you must first configure it on the  
switch. See the “Secure Shell Server configuration” section in the “Configuration Menu” chapter for  
information on how to configure SSH.  
The switch can perform only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Therefore, an  
SSH/Secure Copy (SCP) client will not be able to log in if the switch is performing key generation at  
that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to  
perform the key generation if an SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time.  
The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below.  
•
Server Host Authentication—Client RSA authenticates the switch in the beginning of every  
connection  
•
•
Key Exchange—RSA  
Encryption:  
○ AES256-CBC  
○ AES192-CBC  
○ AES128-CBC  
○ 3DES-CBC  
○ 3DES  
○ ARCFOUR  
•
User Authentication—Local password authentication; Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service  
(RADIUS)  
Command line interface 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following SSH clients are supported:  
•
•
•
•
•
SSH 3.0.1 for Linux (freeware)  
SecureCRT® 4.1.8 (VanDyke Technologies, Inc.)  
OpenSSH_3.9 for Linux (FC 3)  
FedoraCore 3 for SCP commands  
PuTTY Release 0.58 (Simon Tatham) for Windows  
NOTE: The switch implementation of SSH is based on versions 1.5 and 2.0, and supports SSH  
clients from version 1.0 through version 2.0. SSH clients of other versions are not supported. You  
may configure the client software to use protocol SSH version 1 or version 2.  
By default, SSH service is not enabled on the switch. Once the IP parameters are configured, you can  
access the command line interface to enable SSH.  
To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on the workstation by issuing  
the sshcommand, followed by the user account name and the switch IP address:  
>> # ssh <user>@<10Gb switch IP address>  
You will then be prompted to enter your password.  
NOTE: The first time you run SSH from the workstation, a warning message might appear. At the  
prompt, enter yesto continue.  
Accessing the switch  
To enable better switch management and user accountability, the switch provides different levels or  
classes of user access. Levels of access to the CLI and Web management functions and screens  
increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. The three levels of access are:  
•
User—User interaction with the switch is completely passive; nothing can be changed on the  
switch. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch  
statistics and current operational state information.  
•
Operator—Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch. These changes will be  
lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management  
features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone  
by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation, but do have access  
to the Maintenance menu.  
•
Administrator—Only administrators can make permanent changes to the switch configuration,  
changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch  
functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the switch. Because administrators can also  
make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions  
between temporary and permanent changes.  
Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique usernames and passwords. Once  
you are connected to the switch via the local console, Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a  
password. The password entered determines the access level. The default user names/password for  
each access level is listed in the following table.  
NOTE: It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and  
as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see the “Setting  
passwords” section in the “First-time configuration” chapter.  
Command line interface 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2 User access levels  
User account  
Description and tasks performed  
User  
The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch  
status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch.  
The user account is enabled by default, and the default password is user.  
Oper  
The operator manages all functions of the switch. The operator can reset ports or the entire  
switch. By default, the operator account is disabled and has no password.  
Admin  
The super user administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and  
configuration commands on the switch, including the ability to change both the user and  
administrator passwords. The admin account is enabled by default, and the default  
password is admin.  
NOTE: With the exception of the adminuser, setting the password to an empty value can disable  
access to each user level.  
Once you enter the administrator password and it is verified, you are given complete access to the  
switch.  
After logging in, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed. See the “Menu basics” chapter for a  
summary of the Main Menu options.  
[Main Menu]  
info  
- Information Menu  
stats - Statistics Menu  
cfg  
oper  
boot  
- Configuration Menu  
- Operations Command Menu  
- Boot Options Menu  
maint - Maintenance Menu  
diff  
- Show pending config changes [global command]  
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]  
save  
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]  
exit - Exit [global command, always available]  
- Save updated config to FLASH [global command]  
>> Main#  
Idle timeout  
By default, the switch will disconnect the console, Telnet, or SSH session after five minutes of  
inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 60  
minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see the “System configuration” section in the  
“Configuration Menu” chapter.  
Command line interface 12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Typographical conventions  
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this guide:  
Table 3 Typographical conventions  
Typeface or  
symbol  
Meaning  
Example  
AaBbCc123  
Main#  
This type depicts onscreen computer output and prompts.  
AaBbCc123  
Main# sys  
This type displays in command examples and shows text  
that must be typed in exactly as shown.  
<AaBbCc123>  
This italicized type displays in command examples as a  
To establish a Telnet session,  
parameter placeholder. Replace the indicated text with the enter:  
appropriate real name or value when using the command.  
Do not type the brackets.  
host# telnet <IP  
address>  
This also shows guide titles, special terms, or words to be  
emphasized.  
Read the user guide  
thoroughly.  
[ ]  
host# ls [-a]  
Command items shown inside brackets are optional and  
can be used or excluded as the situation demands. Do not  
type the brackets.  
Command line interface 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu basics  
Introduction  
The AOS CLI is used for viewing switch information and statistics. In addition, the administrator can  
use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration.  
To make the CLI easy to use, the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of  
menus and submenus. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or submenus that are available,  
along with a summary of what each command will do. Below each menu is a prompt where you can  
enter any command appropriate to the current menu.  
This chapter describes the Main Menu commands, and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that  
commonly are available from all the menus within the CLI.  
Main Menu  
The Main Menu displays after a successful connection and login. The following table shows the Main  
Menu for the administrator login. Some features are not available under the user login.  
[Main Menu]  
info  
- Information Menu  
stats - Statistics Menu  
cfg  
oper  
boot  
- Configuration Menu  
- Operations Command Menu  
- Boot Options Menu  
maint - Maintenance Menu  
diff  
- Show pending config changes [global command]  
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]  
save  
- Save updated config to FLASH [global command]  
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]  
exit  
- Exit [global command, always available]  
Menu summary  
The Main Menu displays the following submenus:  
•
•
•
Information Menu  
The Information Menu provides submenus for displaying information about the current status of  
the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs, and more.  
Statistics Menu  
This menu provides submenus for displaying switch performance statistics. Included are port, IP,  
ICMP, TCP, UDP, SNMP, routing, ARP, and DNS.  
Configuration Menu  
This menu is available only from an administrator login. It includes submenus for configuring  
every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied.  
Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory (NVRAM).  
•
Operations Command Menu  
Menu basics 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch  
configuration. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. This menu is  
available only from an administrator and operator login.  
•
•
Boot Options Menu  
The Boot Options Menu is available only from an administrator login. This menu is used for  
upgrading switch software, selecting configuration blocks, and for resetting the switch when  
necessary. This menu is also used to set the switch back to factory settings.  
Maintenance Menu  
This menu is used for debugging purposes, enabling you to generate a technical support dump  
of the critical state information in the switch, and to clear entries in the Forwarding Database  
and the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and routing tables. This menu is available only from  
an administrator and operator login.  
Global commands  
Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. These commands are useful  
for obtaining online Help, navigating through menus, and for applying and saving configuration  
changes.  
For help on a specific command, enter help. The following screen displays:  
Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu]  
help  
lines  
diff  
ping  
pushd  
up  
verbose  
apply  
traceroute  
popd  
print  
exit  
save  
telnet  
who  
pwd  
quit  
revert  
history  
The following are used to navigate the menu structure:  
. Print current menu  
.. Move up one menu level  
/ Top menu if first, or command separator  
! Execute command from history  
The following table describes the global commands.  
Table 4 Global commands  
Command  
Action  
? command or  
help  
Provides usage information about a specific command on the current menu. When used  
without the command parameter, a summary of the global commands is displayed.  
. or print  
Displays the current menu.  
.. or up  
Moves up one level in the menu structure.  
/
If placed at the beginning of a command, displays the Main Menu. Otherwise, this is  
used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.  
lines  
diff  
Sets the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. The default is 24 lines.  
When used without a value, the current setting is displayed.  
Shows any pending configuration changes that have not been applied.  
diff flash displays all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not  
saved to flash memory (NVRAM), as well as those that have not been applied.  
apply  
Applies pending configuration changes.  
Menu basics 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4 Global commands  
Command  
Action  
save  
Saves the active configuration to backup, and saves the current configuration as active.  
save n saves the current configuration as active, without saving the active configuration  
to backup.  
revert  
Removes changes that have been made, but not applied.  
revert apply removes all changes that have not been saved.  
Exit or quit  
Exits from the command line interface and logs out.  
ping  
Verifies station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is:  
ping <host name>|<IP address> [attempts (1-32)> [msec delay]]  
[-m|-mgt|-d|-data]  
• IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device.  
• number of tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32).  
• msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts.  
•
By default, the -m or -mgt option for the management port is used. To use data  
ports, specify the -d or –dataoption.  
traceroute  
Identifies the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format  
is:  
traceroute <host name>|<IP address> [<max-hops> [ msec delay ]]  
• IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station.  
• max-hops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-32 devices).  
• msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds to wait for the response.  
pwd  
Displays the command path used to reach the current menu.  
verbose n  
Sets the level of information displayed on the screen:  
• 0= Quiet: Nothing displays except errors, not even prompts.  
• 1= Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown, but no menus.  
• 2= Verbose: Everything is shown. This is the default.  
•
When used without a value, the current setting is displayed.  
telnet  
This command is used to Telnet out of the switch. The format is:  
telnet <hostname> | <IP address> [port] [-m|-mgt|-d|-data]  
By default, the -m or -mgt option for the management port is used. To use data ports,  
specify the -d or –dataoption.  
history  
pushd  
popd  
Displays the history of the last ten commands.  
Remembers the current location in the directory of menu commands.  
Returns to the last pushdlocation.  
who  
Displays users who are logged in.  
Menu basics 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command line history and editing  
Using the command line interface, you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with  
just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line:  
Table 5 Command line history and editing options  
Option  
Description  
history  
Displays a numbered list of the last ten previously entered commands.  
Repeats the last entered command.  
!!  
!n  
Repeats the nth command shown on the history list.  
<Ctrl-p> or Up arrow key Recalls the previous command from the history list. This can be used multiple  
times to work backward through the last ten commands. The recalled command  
can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.  
<Ctrl-n>or Down arrow  
key  
Recalls the next command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to  
work forward through the last ten commands. The recalled command can be  
entered as is, or edited using the options below.  
<Ctrl-a>  
<Ctrl-e>  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line.  
Moves cursor to the end of the command line.  
<Ctrl-b>or Left arrow key Moves the cursor back one position to the left.  
<Ctrl-f>or Right arrow  
Moves the cursor forward one position to the right.  
key  
<Backspace>or Delete key Erases one character to the left of the cursor position.  
<Ctrl-d>  
Deletes one character at the cursor position.  
<Ctrl-k>  
Erases all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line.  
<Ctrl-l>  
<Ctrl-u>  
Redisplays the current line.  
Clears the entire line.  
Other keys  
Inserts new characters at the cursor position.  
Prints the current level menu list.  
Moves to the previous directory level.  
.
..  
Menu basics 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command line interface shortcuts  
The following shortcuts allow you to enter commands quickly and easily.  
Command stacking  
As a shortcut, you can type multiple commands on a single line, separated by forward slashes (/).  
You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want.  
For example, the keyboard shortcut to access the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is:  
Main# cfg/sys/ssnmp/name  
Command abbreviation  
Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters that distinguish the command  
from the others in the same menu or submenu.  
For example, the command shown above could also be entered as:  
Main# c/sys/ssn/n  
Tab completion  
By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and pressing the Tab key, the CLI will  
display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. Entering additional letters will  
further refine the list of commands or options displayed.  
If only one command fits the input text when the Tab key is pressed, that command will be supplied  
on the command line, waiting to be entered. If the Tab key is pressed without any input on the  
command line, the currently active menu displays.  
Menu basics 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First-time configuration  
Introduction  
This chapter describes how to perform first-time configuration and how to change system passwords.  
To begin first-time configuration of the switch, perform the following steps.  
1.  
Connect to the switch console. After connecting, the login prompt displays.  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch  
Copyright(C)2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.  
Password:  
2.  
Enter adminas the default administrator password.  
The system displays the Main Menu with administrator privileges.  
[Main Menu]  
info  
- Information Menu  
stats - Statistics Menu  
cfg  
oper  
boot  
- Configuration Menu  
- Operations Command Menu  
- Boot Options Menu  
maint - Maintenance Menu  
diff  
- Show pending config changes [global command]  
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]  
save  
- Save updated config to FLASH [global command]  
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]  
exit  
- Exit [global command, always available]  
>> Main#  
3.  
From the Main Menu, enter the following command to access the Configuration Menu:  
Main# /cfg  
The Configuration Menu is displayed.  
[Configuration Menu]  
sys  
port  
l2  
- System-wide Parameter Menu  
- Port Menu  
- Layer 2 Menu  
l3  
- Layer 3 Menu  
qos  
- QOS Menu  
acl  
- Access Control List Menu  
- RMON Menu  
- Port Mirroring Menu  
- Uplink Failure Detection Menu  
- Dump current configuration to script file  
- Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server  
- Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server  
- Display current configuration  
rmon  
pmirr  
ufd  
dump  
ptcfg  
gtcfg  
cur  
First-time configuration 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol support  
NOTE: SNMP support is enabled by default.  
1.  
Use the following command to enable SNMP:  
>> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp disable|read only|read/write  
2.  
Set SNMP read or write community string. By default, they are public and private respectively:  
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm  
3.  
4.  
When prompted, enter the proper community string.  
Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support.  
Otherwise apply and save after the performing the “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” steps.  
>> System# apply  
>> System# save  
Setting passwords  
HP recommends that you change all passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required  
under the network security policies. See the “Accessing the switch” section in the “Command line  
interface” chapter for a description of the user access levels.  
To change the user, operator, or administrator password, you must log in using the administrator  
password. Passwords cannot be modified from the user or operator command mode.  
NOTE: If you forget your administrator password, call HP technical support for help using the  
password fix-up mode.  
Changing the default administrator password  
The administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands,  
including the ability to change the user, operator, and administrator passwords.  
The default password for the administrator account is admin. To change the default password:  
1.  
2.  
Connect to the switch and log in using the adminpassword.  
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:  
Main# /cfg  
The Configuration Menu is displayed.  
[Configuration Menu]  
sys  
port  
l2  
- System-wide Parameter Menu  
- Port Menu  
- Layer 2 Menu  
l3  
- Layer 3 Menu  
qos  
- QOS Menu  
acl  
- Access Control List Menu  
- RMON Menu  
- Port Mirroring Menu  
- Uplink Failure Detection Menu  
- Dump current configuration to script file  
- Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server  
- Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server  
- Display current configuration  
rmon  
pmirr  
ufd  
dump  
ptcfg  
gtcfg  
cur  
First-time configuration 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.  
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:  
>> Configuration# sys  
The System Menu is displayed.  
[System Menu]  
syslog  
sshd  
- Syslog Menu  
- SSH Server Menu  
radius  
- RADIUS Authentication Menu  
tacacs+ - TACACS+ Authentication Menu  
ntp  
- NTP Server Menu  
- System SNMP Menu  
- System Access Menu  
- Set system date  
- Set system time  
ssnmp  
access  
date  
time  
timezone - Set system timezone (daylight savings)  
olddst  
dlight  
idle  
notice  
bannr  
- Set system DST for US  
- Set system daylight savings  
- Set timeout for idle CLI sessions  
- Set login notice  
- Set login banner  
hprompt - Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt  
bootp  
dhcp  
- Enable/disable use of BOOTP  
- Enable/disable use of DHCP on Mgmt interface  
reminders - Enable/disable Reminders  
cur  
- Display current system-wide parameters  
4.  
5.  
Enter the following command to set the administrator password:  
System# access/user/admpw  
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt:  
Changing ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required...  
Enter current administrator password:  
NOTE: If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative for help  
using the password fix-up mode.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Enter the new administrator password at the prompt:  
Enter new administrator password:  
Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:  
Re-enter new administrator password:  
Apply and save the change by entering the following commands:  
System# apply  
System# save  
First-time configuration 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default user password  
The user login has limited control of the switch. Through a user account, you can view switch  
information and statistics, but you cannot make configuration changes.  
The default password for the user account is user. This password cannot be changed from the user  
account. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords, as shown in the following  
procedure.  
1.  
2.  
Connect to the switch and log in using the adminpassword.  
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:  
Main# cfg  
3.  
4.  
5.  
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:  
>> Configuration# sys  
Enter the following command to set the user password:  
System# access/user/usrpw  
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.  
Only the administrator can change the user password. Entering the administrator password  
confirms your authority.  
Changing USER password; validation required...  
Enter current administrator password:  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Enter the new user password at the prompt:  
Enter new user password:  
Enter the new user password, again, at the prompt:  
Re-enter new user password:  
Apply and save the changes:  
System# apply  
System# save  
Changing the default operator password  
The operator manages all functions of the switch. The operator can reset ports or the entire switch.  
Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch. These changes will be lost when the  
switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily  
switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch,  
operators cannot severely impact switch operation.  
By default, the operator account is disabled and has no password. This password cannot be changed  
from the operator account. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords, as shown in  
the following procedure.  
1.  
2.  
Connect to the switch and log in using the adminpassword.  
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:  
Main# cfg  
3.  
4.  
5.  
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:  
>> Configuration# sys  
Enter the following command to set the operator password:  
System# access/user/opw  
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.  
First-time configuration 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Only the administrator can change the user password. Entering the administrator password  
confirms your authority.  
Changing OPERATOR password; validation required...  
Enter current administrator password:  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Enter the new operator password at the prompt:  
Enter new operator password:  
Enter the new operator password, again, at the prompt:  
Re-enter new operator password:  
Apply and save the changes:  
System# apply  
System# save  
First-time configuration 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Menu  
Introduction  
You can view configuration information for the switch in the user, operator, and administrator  
command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the CLI to display switch information.  
Menu overview  
Command: /info  
[Information Menu]  
sys  
l2  
l3  
qos  
acl  
rmon  
link  
port  
- System Information Menu  
- Layer 2 Information Menu  
- Layer 3 Information Menu  
- QoS Menu  
- Show ACL information  
- Show RMON information  
- Show link status  
- Show port information  
transcvr - Show Port Transceiver status  
ufd  
sfd  
dump  
- Show Uplink Failure Detection information  
- Show Server Link Failure Detection information  
- Dump all information  
The following table describes the Information Menu options.  
Table 6 Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
sys  
Displays system information.  
l2  
Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.  
Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu.  
Displays the Quality of Service (QoS) Information Menu.  
Displays the Access Control List Information Menu.  
Displays the Remote Monitoring Information Menu.  
Displays configuration information about each port, including:  
l3  
qos  
acl  
rmon  
link  
•
•
•
•
•
Port number  
Port speed  
Duplex mode (half, full, or any)  
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or any)  
Link status (up or down)  
Information Menu 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 6 Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
port  
Displays port status information, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
Port number  
Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not  
Port VLAN ID (PVID)  
Port name  
VLAN membership  
transcvr  
Displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module on each Fiber  
External Port.  
ufd  
Displays Uplink Failure Detection information.  
Displays Server Link Failure Detection information.  
sfd  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more,  
depending on your configuration).  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on  
your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
System Information Menu  
Command: /info/sys  
[System Menu]  
snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Information Menu  
general - Show general system information  
log  
user  
dump  
- Show last 100 syslog messages  
- Show current user status  
- Dump all system information  
The following table describes the System Information Menu options.  
Table 7 System Information Menu options  
Command  
snmpv3  
Usage  
Displays the SNMP v3 Menu.  
general  
Displays system information, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System date and time  
Switch model name and number  
Switch name and location  
Time of last boot  
MAC address of the switch management processor  
IP address of IP interface #1  
Hardware version and part number  
Software image file and version number  
Configuration name  
Log-in banner, if one is configured  
log  
Displays 100 most recent syslog messages.  
Information Menu 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 7 System Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
user  
Displays the User Access Information Menu.  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more,  
depending on your configuration).  
SNMPv3 Information Menu  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3  
[SNMPv3 Information Menu]  
usm  
view  
- Show usmUser table information  
- Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information  
access - Show vacmAccess table information  
group  
comm  
- Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information  
- Show community table information  
taddr  
- Show targetAddr table information  
tparam - Show targetParams table information  
notify - Show notify table information  
dump  
- Show all SNMPv3 information  
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2  
Framework by supporting the following:  
•
•
•
•
a new SNMP message format  
security for messages  
access control  
remote configuration of SNMP parameters  
For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture, see RFC2271 to RFC2276.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Information Menu options.  
Table 8 SNMPv3 Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
usm  
Displays User Security Model (USM) table information.  
Displays information about view name, subtrees, mask and type of view.  
Displays View-based Access Control information.  
view  
access  
group  
Displays information about the group that includes the security model, user name, and  
group name.  
comm  
Displays information about the community table.  
Displays the Target Address table.  
Displays the Target parameters table.  
Displays the Notify table.  
taddr  
tparam  
notify  
dump  
Displays all the SNMPv3 information.  
Information Menu 26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMPv3 USM User Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/usm  
usmUser Table:  
User Name  
Protocol  
-------------------------------- --------------------------------  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2only  
HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY  
HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY  
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY  
The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication  
and privacy of messages. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed  
in the USM user table. The USM user table contains information like:  
•
•
•
the user name  
a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model  
an authentication protocol, which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user  
can be authenticated  
•
the privacy protocol.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 User Table information.  
Table 9 User Table parameters  
Field  
Description  
User Name  
This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.  
Protocol  
This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure  
using a privacy protocol. Switch software supports DES algorithm for privacy. The  
software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.  
SNMPv3 View Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/view  
View Name  
Subtree  
Mask  
Type  
----------------- ---------------------- ------------- --------  
iso  
1
included  
included  
excluded  
excluded  
excluded  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
1
1.3.6.1.6.3.15  
1.3.6.1.6.3.16  
1.3.6.1.6.3.18  
The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management  
information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying  
the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.  
Information Menu 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 View Table information.  
Table 10 View Table parameters  
Field  
Description  
View Name  
Displays the name of the view.  
Subtree  
Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object  
instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.  
Mask  
Type  
Displays the bit mask.  
Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.  
SNMPv3 Access Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/access  
Group Name Model  
Level  
ReadV  
WriteV  
NotifyV  
---------- ------- ------------  
--------- -------- -------  
v1v2grp  
admingrp  
snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv  
usm authPriv  
iso  
iso  
iso  
iso  
v1v2only  
iso  
The access control sub system provides authorization services.  
The vacmAccessTable maps a group name, security information, a context, and a message type,  
which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view.  
The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for  
checking access rights of a group. This group’s access rights are determined by a read-view, a write-  
view, and a notify-view. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group  
while reading the objects. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the  
group when writing objects. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the  
group when sending a notification.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Access Table information.  
Table 11 Access Table parameters  
Field  
Description  
Group Name  
Displays the name of group.  
Prefix  
Model  
Level  
Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values.  
Displays the security model used, for example, SNMPv1, or SNMPv2 or USM.  
Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. For  
example, noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv,or auth-Priv.  
ReadV  
Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access.  
Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access.  
Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access.  
WriteV  
NotifyV  
Information Menu 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 Group Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/group  
Sec Model User Name  
Group Name  
--------- ----------------------------- --------------------  
snmpv1  
usm  
usm  
v1v2only  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2grp  
admingrp  
admingrp  
A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned  
to all the security names belonging to that group. The group is identified by a group name.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Group Table information.  
Table 12 Group Table parameters  
Field  
Description  
Sec Model  
Displays the security model used, which is any one of: USM, SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and  
SNMPv3.  
User Name  
Displays the name for the group.  
Group Name  
Displays the access name of the group.  
SNMPv3 Community Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/comm  
Index  
---------- ---------- -------------------- ----------  
trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap  
Name  
User Name  
Tag  
This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Community Table information.  
Table 13 Community Table parameters  
Field  
Description  
Index  
Displays the unique index value of a row in this table.  
Displays the community string, which represents the configuration.  
Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name.  
Name  
User Name  
Tag  
Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a  
command responder application accepts management requests and to which a  
command responder application sends an SNMP trap.  
Information Menu 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 Target Address Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/taddr  
Name  
---------- --------------- ---- ---------- ---------------  
trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param  
Transport Addr Port Taglist  
Params  
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the SNMP  
engine.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Address Table information.  
Table 14 Target Address Table parameters  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this  
snmpTargetAddrEntry.  
Transport Addr  
Port  
Displays the transport addresses.  
Displays the SNMP UDP port number.  
Taglist  
This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses  
for a particular SNMP message.  
Params  
The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The  
identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages  
to be sent to this transport address.  
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/tparam  
Name  
-------------- --------- ----------------- ---------- ---------  
v1v2param snmpv2c v1v2only snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv  
MP Model User Name  
Sec Model Sec Level  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table information.  
Table 15 Target Parameters Table  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry.  
MP Model  
User Name  
Sec Model  
Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this  
entry.  
Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be  
generated using this entry.  
Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The  
system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this  
variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support.  
Sec Level  
Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.  
Information Menu 30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 Notify Table information  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/notify  
Name  
-------------------- --------------------  
v1v2trap v1v2trap  
Tag  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Notify Table information.  
Table 16 SNMPv3 Notify Table  
Field  
Description  
Name  
The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry.  
Tag  
This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the  
snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag  
value equal to the value of this entry is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length,  
no entries are selected.  
Information Menu 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 dump  
Command: /info/sys/snmpv3/dump  
Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:0F:6A:F8:EF:00  
usmUser Table:  
User Name  
Protocol  
-------------------------------- --------------------------------  
admin  
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY  
HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY  
HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY  
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2only  
vacmAccess Table:  
Group Name Prefix Model Level  
Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV  
---------- ------ ------- ------------ ------ ------- -------- ------  
admin  
v1v2grp  
admingrp  
usm  
snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org  
usm authPriv exact org  
noAuthNoPriv exact org  
org  
org  
org  
org  
v1v2only  
org  
vacmViewTreeFamily Table:  
View Name Subtree  
-------------------- --------------- ------------ --------------  
Mask  
Type  
org  
1.3  
1.3  
included  
included  
excluded  
excluded  
excluded  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
1.3.6.1.6.3.15  
1.3.6.1.6.3.16  
1.3.6.1.6.3.18  
vacmSecurityToGroup Table:  
Sec Model User Name  
Group Name  
---------- ------------------------------- -----------------------  
snmpv1  
usm  
v1v2only  
admin  
v1v2grp  
admin  
usm  
adminsha  
admingrp  
snmpCommunity Table:  
Index Name  
User Name  
Tag  
---------- ---------- -------------------- ----------  
snmpNotify Table:  
Name  
Tag  
-------------------- --------------------  
snmpTargetAddr Table:  
Name  
Transport Addr Port Taglist Params  
---------- --------------- ---- ---------- ---------------  
snmpTargetParams Table:  
Name  
MP Model User Name  
Sec Model Sec Level  
-------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------  
Information Menu 32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System information  
Command: /info/sys/gen  
System Information at 6:56:22 Thu Jan 10, 2008  
Time zone: America/US/Pacific  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch  
sysName:  
sysLocation:  
RackName: Default Rack Name  
EnclosureName: Default Chassis Name  
BayNumber: 1  
Switch has been up for 3 days, 14 hours, 56 minutes and 22 seconds.  
Last boot: 17:25:38 Mon Jan 8, 2007 (software reset)  
MAC address: 00:10:00:01:00:01  
IP (If 1) address: 10.14.4.16  
Management Port MAC Address: 00:10:18:00:00:00  
Management Port IP Address (if 250): 10.20.7.15  
Revision: 0A  
Switch Serial No: BLK7GEFR-3  
Hardware Part No: 445680-B21  
Spare Part No: 447126-001  
Software Version 4.0.0 (FLASH image2), active configuration.  
System information includes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System date and time  
Switch model name and number  
HP c-Class Rack name and location  
Time of last boot  
MAC address of the switch management processor  
IP address of the switch  
Software image file and version number  
Current configuration block (active, backup, or factory default)  
Login banner, if one is configured  
Information Menu 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Show last 100 syslog messages  
Command: /info/sys/log  
Date Time  
Severity level  
Message  
---- ----  
-----------------  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
------------  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
system: link up on port 1  
system: link up on port 8  
system: link up on port 7  
system: link up on port 12  
system: link up on port 11  
system: link up on port 14  
system: link up on port 13  
system: link up on port 16  
system: link up on port 15  
system: link up on port 17  
system: link up on port 20  
system: link up on port 18  
system: link up on port 19  
system: link up on port 21  
system: link up on port 4  
system: link up on port 3  
system: link up on port 6  
system: link up on port 5  
system: link up on port 10  
system: link up on port 9  
Each message contains a date and time field and has a severity level associated with it. One of eight  
different prefixes is used to indicate the condition:  
• EMERG—indicates the system is unusable  
• ALERT—indicates action should be taken immediately  
• CRIT—indicates critical conditions  
• ERR—indicates error conditions or eroded operations  
• WARNING—indicates warning conditions  
• NOTICE—indicates a normal but significant condition  
• INFO—indicates an information message  
• DEBUG—indicates a debug-level message  
Information Menu 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System user information  
Command: /info/sys/user  
Usernames:  
user  
oper  
admin  
- enabled  
- disabled  
- Always Enabled  
Current User ID table:  
1: name tech1 , ena, cos user  
2: name tech2 , ena, cos user  
, password valid, online  
, password valid, offline  
The following table describes the User Name information.  
Table 17 User Name information menu  
Field  
Usage  
user  
Displays the status of the useraccess level.  
Displays the status of the oper(operator) access level.  
Displays the status of the admin(administrator) access level.  
oper  
admin  
Current User ID Table  
Displays the status of configured user IDs. To configure new user IDs, use the  
/cfg/sys/access/user/uid command.  
Information Menu 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Layer 2 information  
Command: /info/l2  
[Layer 2 Menu]  
fdb  
lacp  
- Forwarding Database Information Menu  
- Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu  
hotlink - Show Hot Links information  
8021x  
stp  
- Show 802.1X information  
- Show STP information  
cist  
trunk  
vlan  
- Show CIST information  
- Show Trunk Group information  
- Show VLAN information  
uplink - Show uplink information  
dump - Dump all layer 2 information  
The following table describes the Layer 2 Information Menu options.  
Table 18 Layer 2 Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
fdb  
Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu.  
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu.  
Displays the Hot Links Information Menu.  
lacp  
hotlink  
8021x  
stp  
Displays the 802.1X Information Menu.  
In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STP bridge  
information:  
•
•
•
•
•
Priority  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
Aging time  
You can also refer to the following port-specific STP information:  
•
•
•
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
cist  
Displays Common internal Spanning Tree (CIST) bridge information, including the  
following:  
•
•
•
•
Priority  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
You can also view port-specific CIST information, including the following:  
•
•
•
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
trunk  
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various  
trunk groups.  
Information Menu 36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 18 Layer 2 Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
vlan  
Displays VLAN configuration information, including:  
•
•
•
•
VLAN Number  
VLAN Name  
Status  
Port membership of the VLAN  
uplink  
dump  
Displays the status of Spanning Tree Uplink Fast.  
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu (10K or more, depending  
on your configuration).  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your  
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
FDB information menu  
Command: /info/l2/fdb  
[Forwarding Database Menu]  
find  
port  
vlan  
- Show a single FDB entry by MAC address  
- Show FDB entries on a single port  
- Show FDB entries on a single VLAN  
state - Show FDB entries by state  
dump - Show all FDB entries  
The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC)  
address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. The FDB also  
shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address.  
NOTE: The master forwarding database supports up to 8K MAC address entries on the  
management processor (MP) per switch.  
Table 19 FDB information menu  
Command  
Usage  
find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]  
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are  
prompted to enter the MAC address of the device.  
Enter the MAC address using the format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
(For example: 08:00:20:12:34:56)  
You can also enter the MAC address using the format:  
xxxxxxxxxxxx. (For example: 080020123456)  
port <port number>  
vlan <1-4095>  
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.  
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. The range is 1-4095.  
Displays all FDB entries that match a particular state.  
state unknown|ignore|  
forward|flood|trunk|ifmac  
dump  
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.  
Information Menu 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Show all FDB information  
Command: /info/l2/fdb/dump  
MAC address  
VLAN Port Trnk State  
----------------- ---- ---- ---- -----  
00:02:01:00:00:00 300  
1
TRK  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
00:02:01:00:00:01 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:02 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:03 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:04 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:05 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:06 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:07 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:08 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:09 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 20  
00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 20  
An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state indicates that the switch has learned it. When in the  
trunking (TRK) state, the Trnkfield displays the trunk group number. If the state for the port is listed  
as unknown (UNK), the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch, but has only been seen  
as a destination address. When an address is in the unknown state, no outbound port is indicated.  
Clearing entries from the forwarding database  
To delete a static MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB), see the “Static FDB  
configuration” section in the “Configuration Menu” chapter. To clear the entire forwarding database  
(FDB), see the “Forwarding Database options” section in the “Maintenance Menu” chapter.  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol information  
Command: /info/l2/lacp  
[LACP Menu]  
aggr  
port  
dump  
- Show LACP aggregator information for the port  
- Show LACP port information  
- Show all LACP ports information  
The following table describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu options.  
Table 20 LACP information  
Command  
Usage  
aggr  
Displays LACP aggregator information for the port.  
Displays LACP information for the port.  
Displays all LACP information parameters.  
port  
dump  
Information Menu 38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LACP dump  
Command: /info/l2/lacp/dump  
>> LACP# dump  
port lacp adminkey operkey selected prio attached trunk  
aggr  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
…
LACP dump includes the following information for each port in the switch:  
• lacp—Displays the port’s LACP mode (active, passive, or off)  
• adminkey—Displays the value of the port’s adminkey.  
• operkey—Shows the value of the port’s operational key.  
• selected—Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation  
Group.  
• prio—Shows the value of the port priority.  
• attached aggr—Displays the aggregator associated with each port.  
• trunk—This value represents the LACP trunk group number.  
Hot Links Trigger information  
Command: /info/l2/hotlink/trigger  
Hot Links Info: Trigger  
Current global Hot Links setting: ON  
bpdu disabled  
sndfdb disabled  
Current Trigger 1 setting: enabled  
name "Trigger 1", preempt enabled, fdelay 1 sec  
Active state: None  
Master settings:  
port 20  
Backup settings:  
port 21  
Hot Links trigger information includes the following:  
•
•
•
•
Hot Links status (on or off)  
Status of BPDU flood option  
Status of FDB send option  
Status and configuration of each Hot Links trigger  
Information Menu 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
802.1X information  
Command: /info/l2/8021x  
System capability : Authenticator  
System status : disabled  
Protocol version : 1  
Authenticator  
PAE State  
Backend  
Auth State  
Port Auth Mode  
Auth Status  
---- ------------ ------------ -------------- ----------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
force-auth  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
unauthorized initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
10 force-auth  
11 force-auth  
12 force-auth  
13 force-auth  
14 force-auth  
15 force-auth  
16 force-auth  
*18 force-auth  
*19 force-auth  
*20 force-auth  
*21 force-auth  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
* - Port down or disabled  
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1X parameters.  
Table 21 802.1X information  
Field  
Description  
Port  
Displays each port’s name.  
Auth Mode  
Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port. The  
Authorization mode can be one of the following:  
•
•
•
force-unauth  
auto  
force-auth  
Auth Status  
Displays the current authorization status of the port, either authorized or  
unauthorized.  
Information Menu 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 21 802.1X information  
Field  
Description  
Authenticator PAE State  
Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. The PAE state can be one  
of the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
initialize  
disconnected  
connecting  
authenticating  
authenticated  
aborting  
held  
forceAuth  
Backend Auth State  
Displays the Backend Authorization State. The Backend Authorization state  
can be one of the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
request  
response  
success  
fail  
timeout  
idle  
Information Menu 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spanning Tree information  
Command: /info/l2/stp  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
upfast disabled, update 40  
BPDU Guard disabled  
Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (STP/PVST+)  
VLANs: 1  
Current Root:  
8000 00:02:a5:d1:0f:ed  
Path-Cost  
8
Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel  
20 20 15  
2
Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging  
32768 20 15 300  
2
Port Priority Cost FastFwd State  
Designated Bridge Des Port  
---- -------- ---- -------- ----------- ----------------- -------  
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
n
n
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
The switch software uses the IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). If RSTP/MSTP is turned on,  
see the “Rapid Spanning Tree information” section for Spanning Tree Group information. In addition  
to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STP bridge information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Status of Uplink Fast (upfast)  
Current root MAC address  
Path-Cost  
Port  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
Aging time  
Information Menu 42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can also refer to the following port-specific STP information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
Port Fast Forwarding state  
Designated bridge  
Designated port  
The following table describes the STP parameters.  
Table 22 STP parameters  
Parameters  
Description  
Current Root  
Shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree. Information  
includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the root.  
Path-Cost  
Port  
Path-cost is the total path cost to the root bridge. It is the summation of the path  
cost between bridges (up to the root bridge).  
The current root port refers to the port on the switch that receives data from the  
current root. Zero (0) indicates the root bridge of the STP.  
Priority (bridge)  
Hello  
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become  
the STP root bridge.  
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits  
a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root  
bridge uses the root bridge hello value.  
MaxAge  
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge  
waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it  
reconfigures the STP network. If the bridge is not the root bridge, it uses the  
MaxAgevalue of the root bridge.  
FwdDel  
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a  
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. If  
the bridge is not the root bridge, it uses the FwdDelvalue of the root bridge.  
Aging  
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the bridge  
waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from  
the Forwarding Database.  
Priority (port)  
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to  
a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated  
port for the segment.  
Cost  
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a  
segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost.  
State  
The State field shows the current state of the port. The State field can be one of the  
following: BLOCKING, LISTENING, LEARNING, FORWARDING, or DISABLED.  
Designated bridge  
Designated port  
Shows information about the bridge connected to each port, if applicable.  
Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.  
The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.  
This information includes the port priority (hex) and the port number (hex).  
Information Menu 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rapid Spanning Tree / Multiple Spanning Tree information  
Command: /info/l2/stp  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
upfast disabled, update 40  
BPDU Guard disabled  
Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP)  
VLANs: 1-3  
Current Root:  
8000 00:00:01:00:19:00  
Path-Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel  
20 15  
0
0
9
Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging  
32768 20 15 300  
9
Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type  
---- ---- ---- ------ ---- ------------------- -------- ----  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DSB  
DISC  
10  
11  
12  
FWD DESG 8000-00:00:01:00:19:00 8017 P2P2,Edge  
FWD DESG 8000-00:00:01:00:19:00 8018 P2P  
The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) or the  
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). If RSTP/MSTP is turned on, you can view the  
following RSTP bridge information for the Spanning Tree Group:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Status of Uplink Fast (upfast)  
Current root MAC address  
Path-Cost  
Port  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
Aging time  
You can also refer to the following port-specific RSTP information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
Role  
Designated bridge and port  
Link type  
Information Menu 44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode.  
Table 23 Rapid Spanning Tree parameter descriptions  
Parameter  
Description  
Current Root  
Shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree. Information  
includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the root.  
Path-Cost  
Port  
Path-cost is the total path cost to the root bridge. It is the summation of the path cost  
between bridges (up to the root bridge).  
The current root port refers to the port on the switch that receives data from the  
current root. Zero (0) indicates the root bridge of the STP.  
Priority (bridge)  
Hello  
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the  
STP root bridge.  
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits  
a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root  
bridge uses the root bridge hello value.  
MaxAge  
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge  
waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it  
reconfigures the STP network. If the bridge is not the root bridge, it uses the  
MaxAgevalue of the root bridge.  
FwdDel  
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a  
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. If  
the bridge is not the root bridge, it uses the FwdDelvalue of the root bridge.  
Aging  
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the bridge  
waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the  
Forwarding Database.  
Priority (port)  
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to  
a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port  
for the segment.  
Cost  
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a  
segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting  
of zero (0) indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link  
speed has been auto-negotiated.  
State  
Shows the current state of the port. The State field in RSTP/MSTP mode can be one  
of the following: Discarding (DISC),Learning (LRN),Forwarding (FWD),or  
Disabled (DSB).  
Role  
Shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of  
the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP),  
Master (MAST), or Unknown (UNK).  
Designated bridge  
Shows information about the bridge connected to each port, if applicable.  
Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.  
Designated port  
Type  
The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.  
Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port. Link type  
values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.  
MSTP: The Type field appears in /info/cist.  
Information Menu 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Internal Spanning Tree information  
Command: /info/l2/cist  
Mstp Digest: 0xac36177f50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62  
Common Internal Spanning Tree:  
VLANs MAPPED: 1-16 18-31 33-4094  
VLANs: 1 25 26 4095  
Current Root:  
Path-Cost Port MaxAge FwdDel  
8000 00:03:42:fa:3b:80  
0
1
20  
15  
CIST Regional Root:  
8000 00:03:42:fa:3b:81  
Path-Cost  
11  
Parameters: Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops  
32768 20 15 20  
Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge  
Des Port Hello Type  
---- ---- ---- ------ ---- --------------------- -------- ----- ----  
1 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80 8001  
2 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80 8002  
3 128 2000 DSB  
4 P2P, Edge  
4 128 2000 DSB  
5 128 2000 DSB  
6 128 2000 DSB  
7 128 2000 DSB  
8 128 2000 DSB  
9 128 2000 DSB  
10 128 0  
DSB  
11 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80  
12 128 2000 DSB  
...  
In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) is enabled or disabled, you can view  
the following CIST bridge information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Status of Uplink Fast (upfast)  
CIST root  
CIST regional root  
Priority  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
Hops  
You can also refer to the following port-specific CIST information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
Role  
Designated bridge and port  
Hello interval  
Link type and port type  
Information Menu 46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the CIST parameters.  
Table 24 Common Internal Spanning Tree parameter description  
Parameter  
Description  
CIST Root  
Shows information about the root bridge for the Common Internal Spanning Tree  
(CIST). Values on this row of information refer to the CIST root.  
CIST Regional Root  
Priority (bridge)  
MaxAge  
Shows information about the root bridge for this MSTP region. Values on this row  
of information refer to the regional root.  
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the  
STP root bridge.  
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge  
waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it  
reconfigures the STP network.  
FwdDel  
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a  
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state.  
Hops  
Shows the maximum number of bridge hops allowed before a packet is dropped.  
Priority (port)  
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to  
a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port  
for the segment.  
Cost  
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a  
segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting  
of zero (0) indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link  
speed has been auto-negotiated.  
State  
Role  
Shows the current state of the port. The state field can be one of the following:  
Discarding (DISC), Forwarding (FWD), or Disabled (DSB).  
Shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of  
the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP),  
Master (MAST).  
Designated Bridge  
Designated Port  
Hello  
Shows information about the bridge connected to each port, if applicable.  
Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.  
The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.  
Information includes the port priority (hex) and the port number (hex).  
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits  
a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root  
bridge uses the root bridge hello value.  
Type  
Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port. Link type  
values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.  
Information Menu 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trunk group information  
Command: /info/l2/trunk  
Trunk group 1, Enabled  
port state:  
20: STG 1 forwarding  
21: STG 1 forwarding  
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.  
NOTE: If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding, the remaining  
ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.  
VLAN information  
Command: /info/l2/vlan  
VLAN  
Name  
Status Ports  
---- -------------------------------- ------ ----------------  
1
2
7
Default VLAN  
pc03p  
pc07f  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
4 5  
2
7
11  
14  
15  
16  
6
18  
19  
20  
21  
21  
11  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
24  
pc04u  
8600-14  
8600-15  
8600-16  
8600-17  
35k-1  
35k-2  
35k-3  
35k-4  
pc07z  
redlan  
21  
300 ixiaTraffic  
4000 bpsports  
4095 Mgmt VLAN  
1 12 13 23  
3-6 8-10  
17  
PVLAN Protocol FrameType EtherType Priority Status  
Ports  
----- -------- -------------------- -------- ------ -----------------  
1
1
Ether2  
0080  
0
ena  
4
PVLAN  
PVLAN-Tagged Ports  
----- ---------------------------  
none none  
Private-VLAN  
Type  
Mapped-To Status  
Ports  
------------ --------- ---------- ---------- -----------------  
20 primary empty ena empty  
Information Menu 48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link  
state.  
VLAN information includes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
VLAN Number  
VLAN Name  
Status  
Port membership of the VLAN  
Protocol VLAN information  
Private VLAN information  
Fast Uplink Convergence status  
Command: /info/l2/uplink  
STP uplink fast mode : disabled  
The following table describes the status of Fast Uplink Convergence.  
Table 25 L2 general information  
Field  
Description  
STP uplink fast mode  
Displays the status of STP Uplink Fast: enabled or disabled.  
Information Menu 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Layer 3 information  
Command: /info/l3  
[Layer 3 Menu]  
route  
arp  
- IP Routing Information Menu  
- ARP Information Menu  
ospf  
rip  
- OSPF Routing Information Menu  
- RIP Routing Information Menu  
ip  
- Show IP information  
igmp  
vrrp  
sm  
- Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information  
- Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information  
- Server Mobility Information Menu  
- Dump all layer 3 information  
dump  
The following table describes the Layer 3 Information Menu options.  
Table 26 Layer 3 Information Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
route  
Displays the IP Routing Menu. Using the options of this menu, the system displays the  
following for each configured or learned route:  
•
•
•
•
Route destination IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address  
Type of route  
Tag indicating origin of route  
Metric for RIP tagged routes, specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15  
hops, or 16 for infinite hops)  
•
The IP interface that the route uses  
arp  
ospf  
rip  
ip  
Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu.  
Displays OSPF routing Information Menu.  
Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu.  
Displays IP Information. IP information, includes:  
•
IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, VLAN number,  
and operational status.  
•
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use,  
gateway number, IP address, and health status  
•
•
IP forwarding information: Enable status, lnet and lmask  
Port status  
igmp  
Displays IGMP Information Menu.  
vrrp  
sm  
Displays the VRRP Information Menu.  
Displays the Server Mobility Information Menu.  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu (10K or more, depending  
on your configuration).  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your  
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
Information Menu 50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Route information  
Command: /info/l3/route  
[IP Routing Menu]  
find  
gw  
type  
tag  
if  
- Show a single route by destination IP address  
- Show routes to a single gateway  
- Show routes of a single type  
- Show routes of a single tag  
- Show routes on a single interface  
- Show all routes  
dump  
Using the commands listed below, you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in  
the switch.  
Table 27 Route Information menu options  
Command  
Usage  
find <IP address>  
Displays a single route by IP address. For example,  
100.10.1.1.  
gw <IP address>  
Displays routes to a single gateway. For example, 100.10.1.2.  
Displays routes of a single type.  
type indirect|direct|local|  
broadcast|martian|multicast  
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|  
broadcast|martian|multicast  
Displays routes of a single tag.  
if <1-250>  
Displays routes on a single interface.  
dump  
Displays all routes configured in the switch.  
Show all IP Route information  
Command: /info/l3/route/dump  
Status code: * - best  
Destination  
---------------  
* 11.0.0.0  
* 11.0.0.1  
* 11.255.255.255  
* 12.0.0.0  
* 12.0.0.1  
* 12.255.255.255  
* 13.0.0.0  
Mask  
---------------  
255.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255  
255.255.255.255  
255.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255  
255.255.255.255  
255.0.0.0  
Gateway  
Type  
Tag  
Metr If  
--------------- --------- --------- ---- --  
11.0.0.1  
11.0.0.1  
11.255.255.255  
12.0.0.1  
12.0.0.1  
12.255.255.255  
11.0.0.2  
47.133.88.1  
47.133.88.46  
172.30.52.223  
0.0.0.0  
direct  
local  
broadcast broadcast  
direct  
local  
broadcast broadcast  
indirect  
indirect  
direct  
broadcast broadcast 2  
martian martian  
multicast addr  
fixed  
addr  
211  
211  
211  
12  
12  
12  
fixed  
addr  
ospf  
static  
fixed  
2
211  
24  
* 47.0.0.0  
255.0.0.0  
* 47.133.88.0  
* 172.30.52.223  
* 224.0.0.0  
* 224.0.0.5  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.255  
224.0.0.0  
24  
255.255.255.255  
0.0.0.0  
Information Menu 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the Typeparameter.  
Table 28 IP Routing Type information  
Field  
Description  
indirect  
The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the  
Gateway address.  
direct  
Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.  
Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.  
Indicates a broadcast route.  
local  
broadcast  
martian  
The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Packets to this  
destination are discarded.  
multicast  
Indicates a multicast route.  
The following table describes the Tagparameter.  
Table 29 IP Routing Tag information  
Field  
Description  
fixed  
The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch.  
The address is a static route which has been configured on the switch.  
The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.  
The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).  
The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).  
Indicates a broadcast address.  
static  
addr  
rip  
ospf  
broadcast  
martian  
The address belongs to a filtered group.  
Information Menu 52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARP information  
Command: /info/arp  
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]  
find  
port  
vlan  
addr  
dump  
- Show a single ARP entry by IP address  
- Show ARP entries on a single port  
- Show ARP entries on a single VLAN  
- Show ARP entries for switch's interfaces  
- Show all ARP entries  
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) information includes IP address and MAC address of each  
entry, address status flags, VLAN, and port for the address, and port referencing information.  
The following table describes the Address Resolution Protocol Menu options.  
Table 30 ARP information  
Command  
Usage  
find <IP address>  
Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. For example, 192.4.17.101.  
Displays the ARP entries on a single port.  
Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.  
port <port number>  
vlan <1-4095>  
addr  
Displays the ARP address list: IP address, IP mask, MAC address, and VLAN  
flags.  
dump  
Displays all ARP entries, including:  
•
•
•
•
IP address and MAC address of each entry  
Address status flag  
The VLAN and port to which the address belongs  
The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed  
traffic to the IP address shown)  
Show all ARP entry information  
Command: /info/arp/dump  
IP address  
Flags  
MAC address  
VLAN  
----  
1
1
1
Port  
----  
18  
--------------- -----  
192.168.2.4  
192.168.2.19  
-----------------  
00:50:8b:b2:32:cb  
00:0e:7f:25:89:b5  
00:0f:6a:ed:46:00  
17  
192.168.2.61  
P
The Flag field provides additional information about an entry. If no flag displays, the entry is normal.  
Table 31 ARP dump flag parameters  
Flag  
Description  
P
Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.  
Indirect route entry.  
R
U
Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned.  
Information Menu 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ARP address list information  
Command: /info/arp/addr  
IP address  
IP mask  
MAC address  
VLAN Flags  
--------------- --------------- ----------------- ---- -----  
205.178.18.66 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:04  
205.178.50.1 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:06 1  
P
205.178.18.64 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:05 1  
This screen displays all entries in the ARP cache.  
OSPF information  
Command: /info/l3/ospf  
[OSPF Information Menu]  
general - Show general information  
aindex - Show area(s) information  
if - Show interface(s) information  
virtual - Show details of virtual links  
nbr  
dbase  
- Show neighbor(s) information  
- Database Menu  
sumaddr - Show summary address list  
nsumadd - Show NSSA summary address list  
routes - Show OSPF routes  
dump  
- Show OSPF information  
The following table describes the OSPF Menu options.  
Table 32 OSPF information  
Command  
Usage  
general  
Displays general OSPF information.  
aindex <0-2>  
Displays area information for a particular area index. If no  
parameter is supplied, it displays area information for all the areas.  
if <1-249>  
Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no  
parameter is supplied, it displays information for all the interfaces.  
virtual  
Displays information about all the configured virtual links.  
nbr <nbr router-id (A.B.C.D)>  
Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no  
router ID is supplied, it displays the information about all the current  
neighbors.  
dbase  
Displays OSPF database menu.  
sumaddr <0-2>  
nsumadd <0-2>  
routes  
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas.  
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.  
Displays OSPF routing table.  
dump  
Displays all OSPF information.  
Information Menu 54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OSPF general information  
Command: /info/l3/ospf/general  
OSPF Version 2  
Router ID: 10.10.10.1  
Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626  
Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no  
LS types supported are 6  
External LSA count 0  
External LSA checksum sum 0x0  
Number of interfaces in this router is 2  
Number of virtual links in this router is 1  
16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router  
Total number of entries in the LSDB 10  
Database checksum sum 0x0  
Total neighbors are 1, of which  
2 are >=INIT state,  
2 are >=EXCH state,  
2 are =FULL state  
Number of areas is 2, of which 3-transit 0-nssa 0-stub  
Area Id : 0.0.0.0  
Authentication : none  
Import ASExtern : yes  
Number of times SPF ran : 8  
Area Border Router count : 2  
AS Boundary Router count : 0  
LSA count : 5  
Summary : noSummary  
OSPF interface information  
Command: /info/l3/ospf/if  
Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP  
Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1  
Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1  
Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2  
Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5,  
Transit delay 1  
Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4, Authentication type none  
Information Menu 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Database information menu  
Command: /info/l3/ospf/dbase  
[OSPF Database Menu]  
advrtr - LS Database info for an Advertising Router  
asbrsum - ASBR Summary LS Database info  
dbsumm - LS Database summary  
ext  
nw  
- External LS Database info  
- Network LS Database info  
- NSSA External LS Database info  
- Router LS Database info  
- Self Originated LS Database info  
- Network-Summary LS Database info  
- All  
nssa  
rtr  
self  
summ  
all  
The following table describes the OSPF Database information menu options.  
Table 33 OSPF Database information  
Command  
Usage  
advrtr <router-id (A.B.C.D)>  
Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the Link  
State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the  
advertising router with the specified router ID, for example:  
20.1.1.1.  
asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|  
<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self>  
Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The usage of this command is as  
follows:  
• asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1.1.1displays ASBR summary  
LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.1.  
• asbrsum link_state_id 10.1.1.1displays ASBR  
summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.1.1.1.  
• asbrsum selfdisplays the self advertised ASBR summary  
LSAs.  
• asbrsumwith no parameters displays all the ASBR summary  
LSAs.  
dbsumm  
Displays the following information about the LS database in a  
table format:  
•
•
•
The number of LSAs of each type in each area.  
The total number of LSAs for each area.  
The total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas  
combined.  
•
The total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas  
combined.  
No parameters are required.  
ext <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|  
<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self>  
Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information  
of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same  
as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
nw <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|  
<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self>  
Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of  
each field of the LSA.network LS database. The usage of this  
command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
nssa <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|  
<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self>  
Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of  
each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same  
as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
Information Menu 56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 33 OSPF Database information  
Command  
Usage  
rtr <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|  
<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self>  
Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of  
each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same  
as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
self  
Displays all the self-advertised LSAs. No parameters are  
required.  
summ <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|  
<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self>  
Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed  
information of each field of the LSAs.  
The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the  
command asbrsum.  
all  
Displays all the LSAs.  
OSPF route codes information  
Command: /info/l3/ospf/routes  
Codes: IA - OSPF inter area,  
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2  
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2  
* - best  
IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2  
IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2  
IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2  
IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2  
IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2  
IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2  
Information Menu 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routing Information Protocol information  
Command: /info/l3/rip  
[RIP Information Menu]  
routes - Show RIP routes  
dump  
- Show RIP user's configuration  
The following table describes the Routing Information Protocol information menu options.  
Table 34 RIP information  
Command  
Usage  
routes  
Displays information about RIP routes.  
Displays RIP user’s configuration. Enter 0(zero) for all interfaces.  
dump <0-249>  
RIP Routes information  
Command: /info/l3/rip/routes  
>> IP Routing# /info/l3/rip/routes  
3.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.11 metric 4  
4.0.0.0/16 via 30.1.1.11 metric 16  
10.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 3  
20.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 2  
This table contains all dynamic routes learned through RIP, including the routes that are undergoing  
garbage collection with metric = 16. This table does not contain directly connected routes and locally  
configured static routes.  
RIP user configuration  
Command: /info/l3/rip/dump <1-249>  
RIP USER CONFIGURATION :  
RIP on update 30  
RIP Interface 2 : 102.1.1.1, enabled  
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none  
poison disabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1  
auth none, key none  
RIP Interface 3 : 103.1.1.1, enabled  
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none  
poison disabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1  
Information Menu 58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP information  
Command: /info/l3/ip  
IP information:  
Interface information:  
1: 10.80.23.243  
250: 10.20.7.144  
255.255.254.0 10.80.23.255, vlan 1, up  
255.255.0.0 10.20.255.255, vlan 4095, up  
Default gateway information: metric strict  
1: 10.80.22.1,  
254: 10.20.1.1,  
vlan any, up active  
vlan 4095, up active  
Current ServerMobility settings: OFF  
ServerMobility ports: empty  
DHCP request filtering enabled ports: empty  
Relay on non-ServerMobility ports: Ena  
Active-Backup ports:  
Current IP forwarding settings: OFF, dirbr disabled  
Current network filter settings:  
none  
Current route map settings:  
The following interface and default gateway information is displayed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interface number  
IP address  
IP mask  
IP broadcast address  
Operational status  
BootP relay settings  
Server Mobility settings  
IP forwarding settings  
Network filter settings  
Route map settings  
Information Menu 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGMP multicast group information  
Command: /info/l3/igmp  
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]  
mrouter - Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information  
find  
vlan  
port  
- Show a single group by IP group address  
- Show groups on a single vlan  
- Show groups on a single port  
trunk - Show groups on a single trunk  
detail - Show detail of a single group by IP group address  
dump  
- Show all groups  
The following table describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned  
by the switch.  
Table 35 IGMP Multicast Group menu options  
Command  
Usage  
mrouter  
Displays the Multicast Router Menu.  
find <IP address>  
vlan <1-4094>  
port <port number>  
trunk <1-40>  
detail  
Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address.  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN.  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.  
Displays details about IGMP multicast groups, including source  
and timer information.  
dump  
Displays information for all multicast groups.  
IGMP group information  
Command: /info/l3/igmp/dump  
Note: Local groups (224.0.0.x) are not snooped/relayed and will not appear.  
Source Group VLAN Port Version Mode Expires Fwd  
-------------- --------------- ------- ------ -------- ----- ------- ---  
10.1.1.1  
232.1.1.1  
232.1.1.1  
232.1.1.1  
235.0.0.1  
236.0.0.1  
2
2
2
9
9
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
V3  
V3  
V3  
V3  
V3  
INC  
INC  
INC  
INC  
EXC  
4:16  
4:16  
-
Yes  
Yes  
No  
10.1.1.5  
*
10.10.10.43  
*
2:26  
-
Yes  
Yes  
IGMP Group information includes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IGMP source address  
IGMP Group address  
VLAN and port  
IGMP version  
IGMPv3 filter mode  
Expiration timer value  
IGMP multicast forwarding state  
Information Menu 60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGMP multicast router information  
Command: /info/l3/igmp/mrouter  
[IGMP Multicast Router Menu]  
vlan - Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan  
dump - Show all learned multicast router ports  
The following table describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers  
learned through IGMP Snooping.  
Table 36 IGMP Multicast Router menu options  
Command  
Usage  
vlan <1-4094>  
Displays information for all multicast groups on a single VLAN.  
Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch.  
dump  
Information Menu 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VRRP information  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the HP 10GbE switch provides redundancy  
between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and  
ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then  
elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared  
virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing  
authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.  
Command: /info/l3/vrrp  
VRRP information:  
1: vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if 1, renter, prio 100, master, server  
2: vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if 1, renter, prio 100, backup  
3: vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if 1, renter, prio 100, master, proxy  
When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router using this  
command. VRRP information includes:  
•
•
•
•
Virtual router number  
Virtual router ID and IP address  
Interface number  
Ownership status  
○ owneridentifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the owner when the IP  
address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same.  
○ renteridentifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device  
•
•
Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest priority becomes  
master.  
Activity status  
○ masteridentifies the elected master virtual router.  
○ backupidentifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.  
○ initidentifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event. Once it receives a startup  
event, it transitions to master if its priority is 255, (the IP address owner), or transitions to  
backup if it is not the IP address owner.  
•
•
Server status. The serverstate identifies virtual routers.  
Proxy status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers, where the virtual router shares the  
same IP address as a proxy IP address. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant  
switches to share the same IP address, minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must  
be configured.  
Information Menu 62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Server Mobility Port information  
Command: /info/l3/sm/port  
------------------------------------------------------  
Server Mobility Port 2 Information:  
agent.circuit-id = 55:53:45:36:33:35:31:4d:34:36:00:00:00:00:00:00  
agent.remote-id = 02:00:00:00:02  
Server Mobility : enabled  
Filtering  
: enabled  
Port 2 has no backup port  
This display includes the following information for each port that has Server Mobility configured:  
•
•
•
•
•
Agent Circuit ID—hexadecimal value of the DHCP option 82 Agent Circuit ID  
Agent Remote ID—hexadecimal value of the DHCP option 82 Agent Remote ID  
Server Mobility status (enabled or disabled)  
Status of Server Mobility filtering  
Backup port  
Information Menu 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
QoS information  
Command: /info/qos  
[QoS Menu]  
8021p  
- Show QOS 802.1p information  
The following table describes the commands used to display Quality of Service (QoS) information.  
Table 37 QoS menu options  
Command  
Usage  
8021p  
Displays the QoS 802.1p Information Menu.  
802.1p information  
Command: /info/qos/8021p  
Current priority to COS queue information:  
Priority COSq Weight  
-------- ---- ------  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Current port priority information:  
Port Priority COSq Weight  
----- -------- ---- ------  
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
…
20  
21  
0
0
0
0
1
1
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p priority to COS queue information.  
Table 38 802.1p Priority to COS Queue information  
Field  
Description  
Priority  
Displays the 802.1p Priority level.  
Displays the Class of Service queue.  
Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue.  
Cosq  
Weight  
Information Menu 64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p port priority information.  
Table 39 802.1p Port Priority information  
Field  
Description  
Port  
Displays the port number.  
Displays the 802.1p Priority level.  
Displays the Class of Service queue.  
Displays the scheduling weight.  
Priority  
Cosq  
Weight  
ACL information  
Command: /info/acl  
Current ACL information:  
------------------------  
Filter 1 profile:  
Ethernet  
- VID  
Actions  
: 1/0xfff  
: Set COS to 0  
Filter 2 profile:  
Ethernet  
- VID  
Actions  
: 1/0xfff  
: Permit  
No ACL groups configured.  
Access Control List (ACL) information provides configuration parameters for each Access Control List.  
It also shows which ACLs are included in each ACL Group.  
Information Menu 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RMON Information Menu  
Command: /info/rmon  
[RMON Information Menu]  
hist  
- Show RMON History group information  
alarm - Show RMON Alarm group information  
event - Show RMON Event group information  
dump  
- Show all RMON information  
The following table describes the RMON Information parameters.  
Table 40 RMON History Information Menu  
Command  
Usage  
hist  
Displays the RMON History Information menu.  
Displays the RMON Alarm Information menu.  
Displays the RMON Event Information menu.  
Displays all RMON Information parameters.  
alarm  
event  
dump  
RMON history information  
Command: /info/rmon/hist  
RMON History group configuration:  
Index  
IFOID  
Interval Rbnum Gbnum  
----- ------------------------------ -------- ----- -----  
1
2
3
4
5
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.21  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.18  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.20  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.19  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.21  
30  
30  
30  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
30  
1800  
The following table describes the RMON History Information parameters.  
Table 41 RMON History Information Menu  
Field  
Description  
Index  
Displays the index number that identifies each history instance.  
Displays the MIB Object Identifier.  
IFOID  
Interval  
Rbnum  
Displays the time interval for each sampling bucket.  
Displays the number of requested buckets, which is the number of data slots into  
which data is to be saved.  
Gbnum  
Displays the number of granted buckets that may hold sampled data.  
Information Menu 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RMON alarm information  
Command: /info/rmon/alarm  
RMON Alarm group configuration:  
Index Interval Type rLimit  
fLimit rEvtIdx fEvtIdx last value  
----- -------- ---- -------- -------- ------- ------- ----------  
1
2
3
4
5
30 abs  
900 abs  
300 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
1800 abs  
10  
0
0
10  
20  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
0
8
56344540  
10  
11  
15  
18  
100  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Index  
OID  
----- ------------------------------  
1
2
3
4
5
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.257  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.258  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.259  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13.260  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.261  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.271  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15.262  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.263  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19.266  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.270  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.264  
8
10  
11  
15  
18  
100  
The following table describes the RMON Alarm Information parameters.  
Table 42 RMON Alarm Information Menu  
Field  
Description  
Index  
Displays the index number that identifies each alarm instance.  
Interval  
Displays the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising  
and falling thresholds.  
Type  
Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be  
compared against the thresholds, as follows:  
• abs—absolute value, the value of the selected variable is compared directly with  
the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval.  
• delta—delta value, the value of the selected variable at the last sample is  
subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds.  
rLimit  
fLimit  
rEvtIdx  
Displays the rising threshold for the sampled statistic.  
Displays the falling threshold for the sampled statistic.  
Displays the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is  
crossed.  
fEvtIdx  
Displays the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is  
crossed.  
Information Menu 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 42 RMON Alarm Information Menu  
Field  
Description  
Last value  
Displays the last sampled value.  
Displays the MIB Object Identifier for each alarm index.  
OID  
RMON event information  
Command: /info/rmon/event  
RMON Event group configuration:  
Index Type  
Last Sent  
Description  
----- ---- ---------------- ---------------------------------  
1 both  
2 none  
0D: 0H: 1M:20S Event_1  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_2  
3 log  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_3  
4 trap  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_4  
5 both  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Down  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Up  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInMsg  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInEchos  
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_100  
10 both  
11 both  
15 both  
100 both  
The following table describes the RMON Event Information parameters.  
Table 43 RMON Event Information Menu  
Field  
Description  
Index  
Displays the index number that identifies each event instance.  
Type  
Displays the type of notification provided for this event, as follows: none, log,  
trap, both.  
Last Sent  
Description  
Displays the time that passed since the last switch reboot, when the most recent  
event was triggered. This value is cleared when the switch reboots.  
Displays a text description of the event.  
Information Menu 68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Link status information  
Command: /info/link  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
Port Speed Duplex Flow Ctrl Link  
---- ----- -------- --TX-----RX-- ------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
100  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
up  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
down  
up  
10000  
10000  
10000  
10000  
down  
down  
down  
down  
Use this command to display link status information about each port on a switch, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
Port number  
Port speed (10000 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s)  
Duplex mode (half, full, or any)  
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or any)  
Link status (up, down, or disabled)  
Information Menu 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port information  
Command: /info/port  
Port Tag RMON PVID  
NAME  
VLAN(s)  
---- --- ---- ---- -------------- -------------------------------  
1 n d  
2 n d  
3 n d  
4 n d  
5 n d  
6 n d  
7 n d  
8 n d  
9 n d  
10 n d  
11 n d  
12 n d  
13 n d  
14 n d  
15 n d  
16 n d  
1 Downlink1  
1 Downlink2  
1 Downlink3  
1 Downlink4  
1 Downlink5  
1 Downlink6  
1 Downlink7  
1 Downlink8  
1 Downlink9  
1 Downlink10  
1 Downlink11  
1 Downlink12  
1 Downlink13  
1*Downlink14  
1*Downlink15  
1*Downlink16  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17 n d 4095 Mgmt  
4095  
1
1
1
1
18 n d  
19 n d  
20 n d  
21 n d  
1*Uplink1  
1*Uplink2  
1*Uplink3  
1*Uplink4  
* = PVID is tagged.  
Port information includes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port number  
Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n)  
Whether Remote Monitoring (RMON) is enabled or disabled (e or d)  
Port VLAN ID (PVID)  
Port name  
VLAN membership  
Transceiver status  
Command: /info/transcvr  
------------------------------------------  
Port Device TX-Enable RX-Signal TX-Fault  
------ ------ --------- --------- --------  
XFP1 SR-XFP enabled  
XFP2 SR-XFP enabled  
XFP3 SR-XFP enabled  
ok  
LOST  
ok  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
XFP4 SR-XFP **** NOT Installed ****  
This command displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module on each Fiber External  
Port.  
Information Menu 70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Uplink Failure Detection information  
Command: /info/ufd  
Uplink Failure Detection: Enabled  
LtM status: Down  
Member  
--------- ---  
STG  
STG State  
------------  
Link Status  
-----------  
down  
port 20  
1
10  
15  
DISABLED  
DISABLED *  
DISABLED *  
* = STP turned off for this port.  
LtD status: Auto Disabled  
Member  
Link Status  
-----------  
disabled  
---------  
port 1  
port 2  
port 3  
port 4  
disabled  
disabled  
disabled  
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) information includes:  
•
•
•
•
UFD status, either enabled or disabled  
LtM status and member ports  
Spanning Tree status for LtM ports  
LtD status and member ports  
Information dump  
Command: /info/dump  
Use the dumpcommand to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or  
more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch  
performance.  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set the communication software on your workstation to  
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
Information Menu 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statistics Menu  
Introduction  
You can view switch performance statistics in the user, operator, and administrator command modes.  
This chapter discusses how to use the CLI to display switch statistics.  
Menu information  
Command: /stats  
[Statistics Menu]  
port - Port Stats Menu  
clrports - Clear stats for all ports  
l2  
- Layer 2 Stats Menu  
l3  
- Layer 3 Stats Menu  
mp  
- MP-specific Stats Menu  
- ACL Stats Menu  
- Show SNMP stats  
acl  
snmp  
ntp  
ufd  
sfd  
clrmp  
dump  
- Show NTP stats  
- Show Uplink Failure Detection stats  
- Show Server Link Failure Detection stats  
- Clear all MP related stats  
- Dump all stats  
The following table describes the Statistics Menu options.  
Table 44 Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
port <port number>  
Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to  
display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in  
SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.  
clrports  
Clear statistics counters for all ports.  
Displays the Layer 2 Statistics Menu.  
Displays the Layer 3 Statistics Menu.  
l2  
l3  
mp  
Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view  
information on how switch management processes and resources are currently  
being allocated.  
acl  
Displays the Access Control List Statistics Menu.  
Displays SNMP statistics.  
snmp  
ntp <clear>  
Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics.  
You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics.  
ufd <clear>  
Displays Uplink Failure Detection statistics.  
Add the argument, clear, to clear UFD statistics.  
Statistics Menu 72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 44 Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
sfd <clear>  
Displays Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) statistics.  
Add the argument, clear, to clear SFD statistics.  
clrmp  
dump  
Clears all Management Processor statistics.  
Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and  
debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set  
your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to  
issuing the dump command.  
Port Statistics Menu  
Command: /stats/port <port number>  
[Port Statistics Menu]  
8021x - Show 802.1x stats  
brg  
- Show bridging ("dot1") stats  
ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats  
if  
ip  
link  
rmon  
- Show interface ("if") stats  
- Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats  
- Show link stats  
- Show RMON stats  
clear - Clear all port stats  
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis.  
The following table describes the Port Statistics Menu options:  
Table 45 Port Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
8021x  
Displays IEEE 802.1X statistics  
brg  
Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port.  
Displays Ethernet (“dot3”) statistics for the port.  
Displays interface statistics for the port.  
Displays Internet Protocol statistics for the port.  
Displays link statistics for the port.  
ether  
if  
ip  
link  
rmon  
clear  
Displays Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics for the port.  
Clears all the statistics on the port.  
Statistics Menu 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
802.1X statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/8021x  
Authenticator Statistics:  
eapolFramesRx  
eapolFramesTx  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
eapolStartFramesRx  
eapolLogoffFramesRx  
eapolRespIdFramesRx  
eapolRespFramesRx  
eapolReqIdFramesTx  
eapolReqFramesTx  
invalidEapolFramesRx = 0  
eapLengthErrorFramesRx = 0  
lastEapolFrameVersion = 0  
lastEapolFrameSource = 00:00:00:00:00:00  
Authenticator Diagnostics:  
authEntersConnecting  
authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting  
authEntersAuthenticating  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating  
authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating  
authFailWhileAuthenticating  
authReauthsWhileAuthenticating  
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating  
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating  
authReauthsWhileAuthenticated  
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated  
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated  
backendResponses  
backendAccessChallenges  
backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant  
backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant = 0  
backendAuthSuccesses  
backendAuthFails  
= 0  
= 0  
The following table describes the 802.1X authenticator diagnostics for a selected port:  
Table 46 802.1X statistics for port  
Statistics  
Port  
Authenticator Diagnostics  
authEntersConnecting  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the  
CONNECTING state from any other state.  
authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting  
authEntersAuthenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an  
EAPOL-Logoff message.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING, as a result of an  
EAPResponse/ Identity message being received from the  
Supplicant.  
authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the  
Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful  
authentication of the Supplicant.  
Statistics Menu 74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 46 802.1X statistics for port  
Statistics  
Port  
authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of the Backend  
Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout.  
authFailWhileAuthenticating  
authReauthsWhileAuthenticating  
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating  
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating  
authReauthsWhileAuthenticated  
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated  
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated  
backendResponses  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to HELD, as a result of the Backend  
Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of a re-  
authentication request.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-  
Start message being received from the Supplicant.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-  
Logoff message being received from the Supplicant.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of a re-  
authentication request.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of an EAPOL-  
Start message being received from the Supplicant.  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED, as a result of an  
EAPOLLogoff message being received from the Supplicant.  
Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial  
Access-Request packet to the Authentication server. Indicates  
that the Authenticator attempted communication with the  
Authentication Server.  
backendAccessChallenges  
Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial  
Access-Challenge packet from the Authentication server.  
Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with  
the Authenticator.  
backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant  
Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-  
Request packet (other than an Identity, Notification, Failure, or  
Success message) to the Supplicant. Indicates that the  
Authenticator chose an EAP-method.  
backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplic  
ant  
Total number of times that the state machine receives a  
response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP-Request, and the  
response is something other than EAP-NAK. Indicates that the  
Supplicant can respond to the Authenticators chosen EAP-  
method.  
backendAuthSuccesses  
Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept  
message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the  
Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication  
Server.  
Statistics Menu 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 46 802.1X statistics for port  
Statistics  
Port  
backendAuthFails  
Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject  
message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the  
Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server.  
Bridging statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/brg  
Bridging statistics for port 1:  
dot1PortInFrames:  
63242584  
dot1PortOutFrames:  
63277826  
dot1PortInDiscards:  
dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards:  
dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:  
0
0
0
The following table describes the bridging statistics for a selected port:  
Table 47 Bridging statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
dot1PortInFrames  
The number of frames that have been received by this port from its  
segment.  
A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is  
counted by this object, if and only if, it is for a protocol being  
processed by the local bridging function, including bridge  
management frames.  
dot1PortOutFrames  
The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its  
segment.  
A frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is  
counted by this object, if and only if, it is for a protocol being  
processed by the local bridging function, including bridge  
management frames.  
dot1PortInDiscards  
Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is,  
filtered) by the forwarding process.  
dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards  
The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been  
or would have been learned, but have been discarded due to a lack  
of space to store them in the Forwarding Database.  
If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding  
Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has adverse  
performance effects on the sub network).  
If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing,  
it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.  
dot1StpPortForwardTransitions  
The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state  
to the Forwarding state.  
Statistics Menu 76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/ether  
Ethernet statistics for port 1:  
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors:  
dot3StatsFCSErrors:  
0
0
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames:  
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames:  
dot3StatsLateCollisions:  
0
0
0
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions:  
dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors:  
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs:  
0
NA  
0
dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors:  
0
The following table describes the Ethernet statistics for a selected port:  
Table 48 Ethernet statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are  
not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the  
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.  
The count represented by an instance of this object is  
incremented when the AlignmentErrorstatus is returned  
by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other  
MAC user).  
Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained  
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer  
Management, counted exclusively according to the error  
status presented to the LLC.  
dot3StatsFCSErrors  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are  
an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the  
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.  
The count represented by an instance of this object is  
incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by  
the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).  
Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained  
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer  
Management, counted exclusively according to the error  
status presented to the LLC.  
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames  
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular  
interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one  
collision.  
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also  
counted by the corresponding instance of the  
ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts,or  
ifOutBroadcastPkts,and is not counted by the  
corresponding instance of the  
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrameobject.  
Statistics Menu 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 48 Ethernet statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames  
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular  
interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one  
collision.  
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also  
counted by the corresponding instance of either the  
ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts,or  
ifOutBroadcastPkts,and is not counted by the  
corresponding instance of the  
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFramesobject.  
dot3StatsLateCollisions  
The number of times that a collision is detected on a  
particular interface later than 512 bit-times into the  
transmission of a packet.  
Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.2  
microseconds on a 10 Mbps system. A (late) collision  
included in a count represented by an instance of this object  
is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of  
other collision-related statistics.  
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular  
interface fails due to excessive collisions.  
dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular  
interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.  
A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is  
not counted by the corresponding instance of either the  
dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the  
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the  
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrorsobject.  
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance  
of this object is implementation specific. In particular, an  
instance of this object may represent a count of transmission  
errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise  
counted.  
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that  
exceeds the maximum permitted frame size.  
The count represented by an instance of this object is  
incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the  
MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).  
Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained  
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer  
Management, counted exclusively according to the error  
status presented to the LLC.  
Statistics Menu 78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 48 Ethernet statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors  
A count of frames for which reception on a particular  
interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.  
A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is  
not counted by the corresponding instance of the  
dot3StatsFrameTooLongsobject, the  
dot3StatsAlignmentErrorsobject, or the  
dot3StatsFCSErrorsobject.  
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance  
of this object is implementation specific. In particular, an  
instance of this object may represent a count of received  
errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise  
counted.  
Interface statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/if  
Interface statistics for port 1:  
ifHCIn Counters  
ifHCOut Counters  
Octets:  
51697080313  
51721056808  
UcastPkts:  
BroadcastPkts:  
MulticastPkts:  
Discards:  
65356399  
65385714  
0
0
0
0
6516  
0
0
Errors:  
21187  
The following table describes the interface (IF) statistics for a selected port:  
Table 49 Interface statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
Octets—IfHCIn  
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing  
characters.  
UcastPkts—IfHCIn  
The number of packets, delivered by this sublayer to a higher sublayer, which  
were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer.  
BroadcastPkts—IfHCIn  
MulticastPkts—IfHCIn  
The number of packets, delivered by this sublayer to a higher sublayer, which  
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.  
The total number of packets, delivered by this sublayer. These are the packets  
that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were  
addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer, including those that were  
discarded or not sent.  
For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both group and functional addresses.  
Discards—IfHCIn  
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors were detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-  
layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to  
free up buffer space.  
Statistics Menu 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 49 Interface statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
Errors—IfHCIn  
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that contained  
errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.  
For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of inbound  
transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being  
deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.  
Octets—IfHCOut  
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing  
characters.  
UcastPkts—IfHCOut  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast  
address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
BroadcastPkts—IfHCOut  
MulticastPkts—IfHCOut  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this  
sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64-  
bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts.  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this  
sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both group and functional addresses.  
This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts.  
Discards—IfHCOut  
Errors—IfHCOut  
The number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One  
possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer  
space.  
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that could not  
be transmitted because of errors.  
For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound  
transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors.  
Statistics Menu 80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet Protocol (IP) statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/ip  
GEA IP statistics for port 1:  
ipInReceives :  
ipInHeaderError:  
ipInDiscards :  
0
0
0
The following table describes the Internet Protocol (IP) statistics for a selected port:  
Table 50 IP statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
ipInReceives  
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those  
received in error.  
ipInHeaderError  
ipInDiscards  
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP  
header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the  
switch).  
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to  
prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack  
of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded  
while awaiting re-assembly.  
Link statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/link  
Link statistics for port 1:  
linkStateChange:  
2
The following table describes the link statistics for a selected port:  
Table 51 Link statistics for port  
Statistics  
Description  
linkStateChange  
The total number of link state changes.  
Statistics Menu 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port RMON statistics  
Command: /stats/port <port number>/rmon  
RMON statistics for port 2:  
etherStatsDropEvents:  
etherStatsOctets:  
NA  
0
etherStatsPkts:  
0
etherStatsBroadcastPkts:  
etherStatsMulticastPkts:  
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors:  
etherStatsUndersizePkts:  
etherStatsOversizePkts:  
etherStatsFragments:  
0
0
0
0
0
NA  
0
etherStatsJabbers:  
etherStatsCollisions:  
0
etherStatsPkts64Octets:  
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets:  
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets:  
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets:  
etherStatsPkts64Octets:  
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
The following table describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics of the selected port:  
Table 52 RMON statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
etherStatsDropEvents  
The total number of packets received that were dropped because of  
system resource constraints.  
etherStatsOctets  
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)  
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including  
FCS octets).  
etherStatsPkts  
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast  
packets, and multicast packets) received.  
etherStatsBroadcastPkts  
etherStatsMulticastPkts  
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors  
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the  
broadcast address.  
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a  
multicast address.  
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding  
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518  
octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence  
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS  
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).  
etherStatsUndersizePkts  
etherStatsOversizePkts  
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets  
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were  
otherwise well formed.  
The total number of packets received that were longer than  
1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and  
were otherwise well formed.  
Statistics Menu 82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 52 RMON statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
etherStatsFragments  
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets  
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had  
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number  
of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of  
octets (Alignment Error).  
etherStatsJabbers  
The total number of packets received that were longer than  
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and  
had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral  
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral  
number of octets (Alignment Error). Jabber is defined as the  
condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range to  
detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms.  
etherStatsCollisions  
etherStatsPkts64Octets  
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet  
segment.  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that  
were less than or equal to 64 octets in length (excluding framing  
bits but including FCS octets).  
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets  
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets  
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets  
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets  
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that  
were greater than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that  
were greater than 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that  
were greater than 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that  
were greater than 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that  
were greater than 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
Statistics Menu 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Layer 2 statistics  
Command: /stats/l2  
[Layer 2 Statistics Menu]  
fdb  
lacp  
- Show FDB stats  
- Show LACP stats  
hotlink - Show Hot Links stats  
The following table describes the Layer 2 Statistics Menu options.  
Table 53 Layer 2 Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
fdb  
Displays the Forwarding Database statistics menu.  
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics menu.  
Displays Hot Links statistics.  
lacp  
hotlink  
FDB statistics  
Command: /stats/l2/fdb  
FDB statistics:  
current:  
91 hiwat:  
91  
This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database,  
including the number of current entries and the maximum number of entries ever recorded.  
The following table describes the Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics:  
Table 54 Forwarding Database statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
current  
Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.  
Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database.  
hiwat  
LACP statistics  
Command: /stats/l2/lacp <port number>  
Valid LACPDUs received  
- 0  
Valid Marker PDUs received  
- 0  
Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received - 0  
Unknown version/TLV type  
Illegal subtype received  
LACPDUs transmitted  
Marker PDUs transmitted  
Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted  
- 0  
- 0  
- 0  
- 0  
- 0  
Statistics Menu 84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hot Links statistics  
Command: /stats/l2/hotlink  
Trigger 1 statistics:  
Trigger Name: Trigger 1  
Master active:  
0
Backup active:  
0
FDB update:  
0 failed:  
0
The following table describes the Hot Links statistics:  
Table 55 Hot Links statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
Master active  
Backup active  
Total number of times the Master interface transitioned to the Active state.  
Total number of times the Backup interface transitioned to the Active state.  
Total number of FDB update requests sent.  
FDB update  
failed  
Total number of FDB update requests that failed.  
Statistics Menu 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Layer 3 statistics  
Command: /stats/l3  
[Layer 3 Statistics Menu]  
geal3  
ip  
- GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu  
- Show IP stats  
route  
arp  
dns  
icmp  
tcp  
udp  
igmp  
ospf  
vrrp  
- Show route stats  
- Show ARP stats  
- Show DNS stats  
- Show ICMP stats  
- Show TCP stats  
- Show UDP stats  
- Show IGMP stats  
- OSPF stats  
- Show VRRP stats  
clrvrrp - Clear VRRP stats  
rip - Show RIP stats  
igmpgrps - Total number of IGMP groups  
ipmcgrps - Total number of IPMC groups  
clrigmp - Clear IGMP stats  
ipclear - Clear IP stats  
ripclear - Clear RIP stats  
ospfclear - Clear all OSPF stats  
dump  
- Dump layer 3 stats  
The following table describes the Layer 3 Statistics Menu options.  
Table 56 Layer 3 Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
geal3  
Displays the GEA statistics menu.  
Displays IP statistics.  
Displays route statistics.  
ip  
route  
arp <clear>  
Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. Add the  
argument clear, to clear ARP statistics.  
dns  
Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics.  
Displays ICMP statistics.  
icmp  
tcp  
Displays Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) statistics. Add the  
argument, clear, to clear TCP statistics.  
udp  
Displays User Datagram Protocol (UDP) statistics. Add the argument,  
clear, to clear UDP statistics.  
igmp  
ospf  
vrrp  
Displays IGMP statistics.  
Displays OSPF statistics menu.  
When virtual routers are configured, you can display statistics for the  
virtual routers.  
clrvrrp  
rip  
Clears VRRP statistics.  
Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics.  
igmpgrps  
Displays the total number of Internet Group Management Protocol  
(IGMP) groups registered the switch.  
Statistics Menu 86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 56 Layer 3 Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
ipmcgrps  
Displays the total number of Internet Protocol Multicast (IPMC) groups  
registered on the switch.  
clrigmp <1-4094>|all  
Clears all IGMP statistics for the selected VLANs.  
ipclear  
Clears IP statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all  
the IP statistics.  
ripclear  
ospfclear  
dump  
Clears all Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics.  
Clears all Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) statistics.  
Displays all Layer 3 statistics.  
GEA Layer 3 statistics menu  
Command: /stats/l3/geal3  
[GEA Layer 3 Statistics Menu]  
l3bucket - Show GEA L3 bucket for an IP address  
dump  
- Dump GEA layer 3 stats counter  
The following table describes the Layer 3 GEA Statistics Menu options.  
Table 57 Layer 3 GEA statistics menu options  
Command  
l3bucket  
Dump  
Usage  
Displays GEA statistics for a specific IP address.  
Displays all GEA statistics.  
GEA statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/geal3/dump  
GEA L3 statistics:  
Max L3 table size  
: 4096  
Number of L3 entries used  
: 3  
Max LPM table size  
Number of LPM entries used  
: 512  
: 4  
Statistics Menu 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/ip  
IP statistics:  
ipInReceives: 36475  
ipInAddrErrors: 905  
ipInUnknownProtos: 0  
ipInDelivers: 4103  
ipOutDiscards: 0  
ipDefaultTTL: 255  
ipInHdrErrors: 0  
ipInDiscards: 0  
ipOutRequests: 30974  
The following table describes the IP statistics:  
Table 58 IP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
ipInReceives  
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those  
received in error.  
ipInHdrErrors  
ipInAddrErrors  
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers,  
including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-  
to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so on.  
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP  
header destination field was not a valid address to be received at this switch.  
This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of  
unsupported classes (for example, Class E).  
For entities which are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward  
datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination  
address was not a local address.  
ipInUnknownProtos  
ipInDiscards  
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded  
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.  
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to  
prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for  
lack of buffer space).  
This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-  
assembly.  
ipInDelivers  
ipOutRequests  
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols  
(including ICMP).  
The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user-protocols (including ICMP)  
supplied to IP in requests for transmission.  
This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.  
ipOutDiscards  
ipDefaultTTL  
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to  
prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (for  
example, for lack of buffer space).  
This counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagramsif any  
such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.  
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of  
datagrams originated at this switch, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by  
the transport layer protocol.  
Statistics Menu 88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Route statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/route  
Route statistics:  
ipRoutesCur:  
ipRoutesMax:  
8 ipRoutesHighWater:  
4096  
8
The following table describes the Route statistics:  
Table 59 Route statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
ipRoutesCur  
The total number of outstanding routes in the route table.  
The maximum number of supported routes.  
ipRoutesMax  
ipRoutesHighWater  
The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.  
ARP statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/arp  
ARP statistics:  
arpEntriesCur:  
arpEntriesMax:  
2 arpEntriesHighWater:  
4095  
4
The following table describes the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics:  
Table 60 ARP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
arpEntriesCur  
The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table.  
The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.  
The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table.  
arpEntriesMax  
arpEntriesHighWater  
DNS statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/dns  
DNS statistics:  
dnsInRequests:  
dnsBadRequests:  
0 dnsOutRequests:  
0
0
The following table describes the Domain Name System (DNS) statistics:  
Table 61 DNS statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
dnsInRequests  
The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.  
The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted.  
The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.  
dnsOutRequests  
dnsBadRequests  
Statistics Menu 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ICMP statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/icmp  
ICMP statistics:  
icmpInMsgs:  
245802 icmpInErrors:  
41 icmpInTimeExcds:  
0 icmpInSrcQuenchs:  
0 icmpInEchos:  
244350 icmpInTimestamps:  
0 icmpInAddrMasks:  
0 icmpOutMsgs:  
0 icmpOutDestUnreachs:  
0 icmpOutParmProbs:  
0 icmpOutRedirects:  
253777 icmpOutEchoReps:  
0 icmpOutTimestampReps:  
0 icmpOutAddrMaskReps:  
1393  
icmpInDestUnreachs:  
icmpInParmProbs:  
icmpInRedirects:  
icmpInEchoReps:  
icmpInTimestampReps:  
icmpInAddrMaskReps:  
icmpOutErrors:  
icmpOutTimeExcds:  
icmpOutSrcQuenchs:  
icmpOutEchos:  
0
0
18  
0
0
253810  
15  
0
0
18  
0
0
icmpOutTimestamps:  
icmpOutAddrMasks:  
The following table describes the Internet Control Messaging Protocol (ICMP) statistics:  
Table 62 ICMP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
icmpInMsgs  
The total number of ICMP messages which the switch received. Note that this  
counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.  
icmpInErrors  
The number of ICMP messages which the switch received but determined as  
having ICMP specific errors (for example bad ICMP checksums and bad  
length).  
icmpInDestUnreachs  
icmpInTimeExcds  
icmpInParmProbs  
icmpInSrcQuenchs  
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.  
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.  
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.  
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data)  
messages received.  
icmpInRedirects  
icmpInEchos  
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.  
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.  
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.  
icmpInEchoReps  
icmpInTimestamps  
icmpInTimestampReps  
icmpInAddrMasks  
icmpInAddrMaskReps  
icmpOutMsgs  
The total number of ICMP messages which this switch attempted to send. Note  
that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.  
icmpOutErrors  
The number of ICMP messages that this switch did not send due to problems  
discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. This value should not include  
errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the  
resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of errors  
that contribute to this counter's value.  
Statistics Menu 90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 62 ICMP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
icmpOutDestUnreachs  
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.  
icmpOutTimeExcds  
icmpOutParmProbs  
icmpOutSrcQuenchs  
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data)  
messages sent.  
icmpOutRedirects  
icmpOutEchos  
The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.  
icmpOutEchoReps  
icmpOutTimestamps  
icmpOutTimestampReps  
icmpOutAddrMasks  
icmpOutAddrMaskReps  
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.  
TCP statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/tcp  
TCP statistics:  
tcpRtoAlgorithm:  
tcpRtoMax:  
tcpActiveOpens:  
tcpAttemptFails:  
tcpInSegs:  
4 tcpRtoMin:  
240000 tcpMaxConn:  
252214 tcpPassiveOpens:  
528 tcpEstabResets:  
756401 tcpOutSegs:  
0 tcpInErrs:  
0
512  
7
4
756655  
tcpRetransSegs:  
tcpCurBuff:  
0
3
0 tcpCurConn:  
tcpOutRsts:  
417  
The following table describes the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) statistics:  
Table 63 TCP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
tcpRtoAlgorithm  
The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting  
unacknowledged octets.  
tcpRtoMin  
The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission  
timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type  
depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In  
particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the  
semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in Request For Comments (RFC)  
793.  
Statistics Menu 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 63 TCP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
tcpRtoMax  
The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission  
timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type  
depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In  
particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the  
semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.  
tcpMaxConn  
The limit on the total number of TCP connections the switch can support. In  
entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic, this object should  
contain the value -1.  
tcpActiveOpens  
tcpPassiveOpens  
tcpAttemptFails  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-  
SENT state from the CLOSED state.  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-  
RCVD state from the LISTEN state.  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the  
CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the  
number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN  
state from the SYN-RCVD state.  
tcpEstabResets  
tcpInSegs  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the  
CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE- WAIT state.  
The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This  
count includes segments received on currently established connections.  
tcpOutSegs  
The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but  
excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.  
tcpRetransSegs  
tcpInErrs  
The total number of segments retransmitted, that is, the number of TCP segments  
transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.  
The total number of segments received in error (for example, bad TCP  
checksums).  
tcpCurBuff  
The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol  
stack.  
tcpCurConn  
tcpOutRsts  
The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened.  
The number of TCP segments sent containing the reset (RST) flag.  
Statistics Menu 92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UDP statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/udp  
UDP statistics:  
udpInDatagrams:  
udpInErrors:  
54 udpOutDatagrams:  
0 udpNoPorts:  
43  
1578077  
The following table describes the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) statistics:  
Table 64 UDP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
udpInDatagrams  
The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.  
The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this switch.  
udpOutDatagrams  
udpInErrors  
The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for  
reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.  
udpNoPorts  
The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no  
application at the destination port.  
IGMP Multicast Group statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/igmp <VLAN number>  
------------------------------------------------------------  
IGMP Snoop vlan 1 statistics:  
------------------------------------------------------------  
rxIgmpValidPkts:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
rxIgmpInvalidPkts:  
0
0
rxIgmpGenQueries:  
rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:  
rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries:  
rxIgmpLeaves:  
rxIgmpReports:  
0
0
0
0
txIgmpReports:  
txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:  
rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords:  
rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords:  
txIgmpLeaves:  
rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:  
This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups.  
The following table describes the IGMP statistics:  
Table 65 IGMP statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
rxIgmpValidPkts  
Total number of valid IGMP packets received  
Total number of invalid packets received  
Total number of General Membership Query packets received  
rxIgmpInvalidPkts  
rxIgmpGenQueries  
rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries  
Total number of Membership Query packets received from  
specific groups  
rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries  
rxIgmpLeaves  
Total number of Group Source-Specific Queries (GSSQ) received  
Total number of Leave requests received  
Statistics Menu 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 65 IGMP statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
rxIgmpReports  
Total number of Membership Reports received  
Total number of Membership reports transmitted  
txIgmpReports  
txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries  
Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific  
groups  
txIgmpLeaves  
Total number of Leave messages transmitted  
Total number of Current State records received  
Total number of Source List Change records received  
Total number of Filter Change records received.  
rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords  
rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords  
rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords  
OSPF statistics menu  
Command: /stats/l3/ospf  
[OSPF stats Menu]  
general - Show global stats  
aindex - Show area(s) stats  
if - Show interface(s) stats  
The following table describes the OSPF statistics menu options.  
Table 66 OSPF statistics menu options  
Command  
Usage  
general  
Displays OSPF global statistics.  
Displays area index statistics.  
Displays interface statistics.  
aindex <0-2>  
if <1-249>  
Statistics Menu 94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OSPF global statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/ospf/general  
OSPF stats  
----------  
Rx/Tx Stats:  
Rx  
Tx  
--------  
--------  
Pkts  
hello  
database  
ls requests  
ls acks  
0
23  
4
3
7
0
518  
12  
1
7
ls updates  
Nbr change stats:  
hello  
9
7
Intf change Stats:  
up 4  
2
0
2
2
2
2
0
0
2
0
0
1
start  
n2way  
down 2  
loop 0  
unloop 0  
wait timer 2  
backup 0  
nbr change 5  
adjoint ok  
negotiation done  
exchange done  
bad requests  
bad sequence  
loading done  
n1way  
rst_ad  
down  
Timers kickoff  
hello  
514  
retransmit  
lsa lock  
lsa ack  
dbage  
summary  
1028  
0
0
0
0
0
ase export  
The following table describes the OSPF global statistics:  
Table 67 OSPF global statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
Rx Tx stats:  
Rx Pkts  
The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
Tx Pkts  
Rx Hello  
Tx Hello  
Rx Database  
The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas  
and interfaces.  
Tx Database  
The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas  
and interfaces.  
Rx ls Requests  
The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
Tx ls Requests  
The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and  
interfaces.  
Statistics Menu 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 67 OSPF global statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
Rx ls Acks  
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
Tx ls Acks  
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
Rx ls Updates  
Tx ls Updates  
The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and  
interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and  
interfaces.  
Nbr change stats:  
hello  
The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and  
interfaces.  
Start  
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an indication that Hello  
packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds)  
across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
n2way  
The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this  
router and other neighboring routers.  
adjoint ok  
The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an  
adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
negotiation done  
exchange done  
bad requests  
The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave  
relationship has been negotiated, and sequence numbers have been exchanged,  
across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an adjacency's final  
state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets, across  
all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link  
state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF  
areas.  
bad sequence  
The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received  
that either:  
•
•
•
Has an unexpected DD sequence number  
Unexpectedly has the init bit set  
Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a  
Database Description packet.  
Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency  
establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
loading done  
n1way  
The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of  
the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors, in which this  
router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas.  
rst_ad  
The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all  
OPSF areas and interfaces.  
Statistics Menu 96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 67 OSPF global statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
down  
The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the initial state of a  
neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
Intf Change Stats:  
up  
The sum total number of interfaces up in all OSPF areas.  
The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.  
down  
loop  
The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all  
OSPF areas and interfaces.  
unloop  
The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached network in all  
OSPF areas.  
wait timer  
The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired, indicating the end  
of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated  
Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
backup  
The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for  
all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
nbr change  
The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated  
with any interface across all OSPF areas.  
Timers Kickoff:  
hello  
The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the  
send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces.  
retransmit  
lsa lock  
lsa ack  
The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF  
areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has  
been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of times the LSA Acktimer has been fired across all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
dbage  
The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired.  
summary  
ase export  
The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.  
The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been  
fired.  
Statistics Menu 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VRRP statistics  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the HP 10GbE switch provides redundancy  
between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and  
ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device.  
One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and  
assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual  
routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.  
When virtual routers are configured, you can display protocol statistics for VRRP.  
Command: /stats/l3/vrrp  
>> Layer 3 Statistics# vrrp  
VRRP statistics:  
vrrpInAdvers:  
0 vrrpBadAdvers:  
0
0 vrrpBadVrid:  
0 vrrpBadData:  
0 vrrpBadInterval:  
0
vrrpOutAdvers:  
vrrpBadVersion:  
vrrpBadAddress:  
vrrpBadPassword:  
0
0
0
The following table describes the VRRP statistics.  
Table 68 VRRP statistics  
Field  
Description  
vrrpInAdvers  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad version number.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad address.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad password.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad virtual router ID.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that had bad data.  
vrrpOutAdvers  
vrrpBadVersion  
vrrpBadAddress  
vrrpBadPassword  
vrrpBadAdvers  
vrrpBadVrid  
vrrpBadData  
vrrpBadInterval  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that had a bad interval.  
Statistics Menu 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RIP statistics  
Command: /stats/l3/rip  
RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION:  
RIP packets received = 12  
RIP packets sent = 75  
RIP request received = 0  
RIP response received = 12  
RIP request sent = 3  
RIP response sent = 72  
RIP route timeout = 0  
RIP bad size packet received = 0  
RIP bad version received = 0  
RIP bad zeros received = 0  
RIP bad src port received = 0  
RIP bad src IP received = 0  
RIP packets from self received = 0  
Statistics Menu 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Management Processor statistics  
Command: /stats/mp  
[MP-specific Statistics Menu]  
pkt  
tcb  
ucb  
cpu  
- Show Packet stats  
- Show All TCP control blocks in use  
- Show All UDP control blocks in use  
- Show CPU utilization  
The following table describes the Statistics Menu options for the management processor (MP):  
Table 69 MP-specific Statistics Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
pkt  
Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load.  
Displays all Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) control blocks (TCB) that are in use.  
Displays all User Datagram Protocol (UDP) control blocks (UCB) that are in use.  
Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds.  
tcb  
ucb  
cpu  
Packet statistics  
Command: /stats/mp/pkt  
Packet counts:  
allocs:  
36692  
frees:  
36692  
mediums:  
jumbos:  
smalls:  
0
0
0
0
mediums hi-watermark:  
jumbos hi-watermark:  
smalls hi-watermark:  
3
0
2
failures:  
The following table describes the packet statistics.  
Table 70 MP specific packet statistics  
Description  
Example statistic  
allocs  
Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP  
protocol stack.  
frees  
Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer  
pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
mediums  
Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the  
packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
mediums hi-watermark  
jumbos  
The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from  
the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet  
buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
jumbos hi-watermark  
smalls  
The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the  
packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet  
buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
Statistics Menu 100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 70 MP specific packet statistics  
Description  
Example statistic  
smalls hi-watermark  
The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the  
packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
failures  
Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP  
protocol stack.  
TCP statistics  
Command: /stats/mp/tcb  
All TCP allocated control blocks:  
10ad41e8: 0.0.0.0  
0 <=> 0.0.0.0  
80 listen  
10ad5790: 47.81.27.5  
1171 <=> 47.80.23.243  
23 established  
The following table describes the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) control block (TCB) statistics  
shown in this example:  
Table 71 TCP statistics  
Description  
Memory  
Example statistic  
10ad41e8/10ad5790  
0.0.0.0/47.81.27.5  
0/1171  
Destination IP address  
Destination port  
Source IP  
0.0.0.0/47.80.23.243  
80/23  
Source port  
State  
listen/established  
UDP statistics  
Command: /stats/mp/ucb  
All UDP allocated control blocks:  
161: listen  
The following table describes the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) control block (UCB) statistics shown  
in this example:  
Table 72 UDP statistics  
Description  
Control block  
State  
Example Statistic  
161  
listen  
Statistics Menu 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CPU statistics  
Command: /stats/mp/cpu  
CPU utilization:  
cpuUtil1Second:  
cpuUtil4Seconds:  
cpuUtil64Seconds:  
8%  
9%  
8%  
The following table describes the management port CPU utilization statistics:  
Table 73 CPU statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
cpuUtil1Second  
The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second. This is shown as a percentage.  
The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds. This is shown as a percentage.  
The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds. This is shown as a percentage.  
cpuUtil4Seconds  
cpuUtil64Seconds  
Access Control List (ACL) statistics menu  
Command: /stats/acl  
[ACL Menu]  
acl  
- Display ACL stats  
dump  
- Display all available ACL stats  
clracl - Clear ACL stats  
The following table describes the Access Control List (ACL) Statistics menu options:  
Table 74 ACL statistics menu options  
Command  
Usage  
acl <1-384>  
Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL.  
Displays all ACL statistics.  
dump  
clracl  
Clear all ACL statistics.  
ACL statistics  
Command: /stats/acl/dump  
Hits for ACL 1: 26057515  
Hits for ACL 2: 26057497  
Statistics Menu 102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP statistics  
Command: /stats/snmp  
SNMP statistics:  
snmpInPkts:  
54 snmpInBadVersions:  
0 snmpInBadC'tyUses:  
0 snmpEnableAuthTraps:  
54 snmpInBadTypes:  
0 snmpInNoSuchNames:  
0 snmpInReadOnlys:  
0 snmpInTotalReqVars:  
0 snmpInGetRequests:  
52 snmpInSetRequests:  
0 snmpInTraps:  
0 snmpOutNoSuchNames:  
0 snmpOutReadOnlys:  
0 snmpOutGetRequests:  
0 snmpOutSetRequests:  
54 snmpOutTraps:  
0
0
0
0
0
snmpInBadC'tyNames:  
snmpInASNParseErrs:  
snmpOutPkts:  
snmpInTooBigs:  
snmpInBadValues:  
snmpInGenErrs:  
snmpInTotalSetVars:  
snmpInGetNexts:  
snmpInGetResponses:  
snmpOutTooBigs:  
snmpOutBadValues:  
snmpOutGenErrs:  
snmpOutGetNexts:  
snmpOutGetResponses:  
snmpSilentDrops:  
0
105  
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0 snmpProxyDrops:  
The following table describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) statistics:  
Table 75 SNMP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
snmpInPkts  
The total number of messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport  
service.  
snmpInBadVersions  
snmpInBadC'tyNames  
snmpInBadC'tyUses  
The total number of SNMP messages, which were delivered to the SNMP protocol  
entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.  
The total number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity that used an  
SNMP community name not known to the switch.  
The total number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity that  
represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community  
named in the message.  
snmpInASNParseErrs  
The total number of ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One) or BER (Basic Encoding  
Rules), errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP  
messages received.  
The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) method of specifying abstract objects is  
called ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One, defined in X.208), and one set of  
rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER  
(Basic Encoding Rules, defined in X.209).  
ASN.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types, from  
simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and  
sequences.  
BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN.1 type as a string of  
eight-bit octets.  
snmpEnableAuthTraps  
snmpOutPkts  
An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this switch.  
The total number of SNMP messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol  
entity to the transport service.  
snmpInBadTypes  
The total number of SNMP messages which failed ASN.1 parsing.  
Statistics Menu 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 75 SNMP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
snmpInTooBigs  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) that were delivered to the  
SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big.  
snmpInNoSuchNames  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) that were delivered to the  
SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is  
noSuchName.  
snmpInBadValues  
snmpInReadOnlys  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) that were delivered to the  
SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue.  
The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were delivered  
to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is read-  
only.  
It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU, which  
contains the value read-only in the error-status field. As such, this object is provided  
as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.  
snmpInGenErrs  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were delivered to the  
SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr.  
snmpInTotalReqVars  
The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the  
SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and Get-  
Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).  
snmpInTotalSetVars  
The total number of MIB objects, which have been altered successfully by the  
SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data  
Units (PDUs).  
snmpInGetRequests  
snmpInGetNexts  
The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been  
accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpInSetRequests  
snmpInGetResponses  
snmpInTraps  
The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been  
accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpOutTooBigs  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big.  
snmpOutNoSuchNames  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status is  
noSuchName.  
snmpOutBadValues  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is  
badValue.  
snmpOutReadOnlys  
snmpOutGenErrs  
Not in use.  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr.  
Statistics Menu 104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 75 SNMP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
snmpOutGetRequests  
The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpOutGetNexts  
snmpOutSetRequests  
snmpOutGetResponses  
snmpOutTraps  
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been  
generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been  
generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpSilentDrops  
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-  
PDUs,GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs,and InformRequest-  
PDUsdelivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the size of  
a reply containing an alternate Response-PDU with an empty variable-bindings field  
was too large.  
snmpProxyDrops  
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,  
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs,and InformRequest-PDUs  
delivered to the SNMP entity that were silently dropped because the transmission of  
the message to a proxy target failed in a manner (other than a time-out) such that  
no Response-PDU could be returned.  
NTP statistics  
Command: /stats/ntp  
NTP statistics:  
Primary Server:  
Requests Sent:  
17  
17  
1
Responses Received:  
Updates:  
Secondary Server:  
Requests Sent:  
Responses Received:  
Updates:  
0
0
0
The switch uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock  
with an atomic time-calibrated NTP server. With NTP enabled, the switch can accurately update its  
internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs.  
Statistics Menu 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the NTP statistics:  
Table 76 NTP statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
Primary Server  
• Requests Sent—The total number of NTP requests the switch  
sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time.  
• Responses Received—The total number of NTP responses  
received from the primary NTP server.  
• Updates—The total number of times the switch updated its time  
based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP  
server.  
Secondary Server  
• Requests Sent—The total number of NTP requests the switch  
sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.  
• Responses Received—The total number of NTP responses  
received from the secondary NTP server.  
• Updates—The total number of times the switch updated its time  
based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP  
server.  
Uplink Failure Detection statistics  
This menu option allows you to display Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) statistics. To reset UFD statistics,  
follow the command /stats/ufdwith the following argument: clear.  
Command: /stats/ufd  
Uplink Failure Detection statistics:  
Number of times LtM link failure: 1  
Number of times LtM link in Blocking State: 0  
Number of times LtD got auto disabled: 1  
The following table describes the Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) statistics:  
Table 77 Uplink Failure Detection statistics  
Statistics  
Description  
Number of times LtM link failure  
The total numbers of times that link failures were  
detected on the uplink ports in the Link to Monitor group.  
Number of times LtM link in Blocking  
State  
The total number of times that Spanning Tree Blocking  
state was detected on the uplink ports in the Link to  
Monitor group.  
Number of times LtD got auto disabled  
The total numbers of times that downlink ports in the Link  
to Disable group were automatically disabled because  
of a failure in the Link to Monitor group.  
Statistics Menu 106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statistics dump  
Command: /stats/dump  
Use the dumpcommand to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more,  
depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to  
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
Statistics Menu 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Menu  
Introduction  
The Configuration Menu is only available from an administrator login. It includes submenus for  
configuring every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied.  
Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory (NVRAM).  
Menu information  
Command: /cfg  
[Configuration Menu]  
sys  
port  
l2  
- System-wide Parameter Menu  
- Port Menu  
- Layer 2 Menu  
l3  
- Layer 3 Menu  
qos  
- QOS Menu  
acl  
- Access Control List Menu  
- RMON Menu  
- Port Mirroring Menu  
- Uplink Failure Detection Menu  
- Server Link Failure Detection Menu  
- Dump current configuration to script file  
- Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server  
- Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server  
- Display current configuration  
rmon  
pmirr  
ufd  
sfd  
dump  
ptcfg  
gtcfg  
cur  
The following table describes the Configuration Menu options.  
Table 78 Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
sys  
Displays the System Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Port Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Access Control List Configuration Menu.  
Displays the RMON Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Uplink Failure Detection Configuration Menu.  
port <port number>  
l2  
l3  
qos  
acl  
rmon  
pmirr  
ufd  
sfd  
Displays the Server Link Failure Detection Configuration  
Menu.  
dump  
Dumps current configuration to a script file.  
Configuration Menu 108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 78 Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
ptcfg <host name or IP address of  
FTP/TFTP server> <filename on host>  
Backs up current configuration to FTP/TFTP server.  
gtcfg <host name or IP address of  
FTP/TFTP server> <filename on host>  
Restores current configuration from FTP/TFTP server.  
Displays the current configuration parameters.  
cur  
Viewing, applying, reverting, and saving changes  
As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters, the changes you make do not take effect  
immediately. All changes are considered pending until you explicitly apply them. Also, any changes  
are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved.  
While configuration changes are in the pending state, you can:  
•
•
•
•
View the pending changes  
Apply the pending changes  
Revert to restore configuration parameters set with the last apply command  
Save the changes to flash memory  
Viewing pending changes  
You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diffat any CLI prompt:  
# diff  
You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash  
memory by entering diff flashat any CLI prompt:  
# diff flash  
Applying pending changes  
To make your configuration changes active, you must apply them. To apply configuration changes,  
enter the following command at any prompt:  
# apply  
NOTE: All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied.  
Reverting changes  
The revertcommand removes configuration changes that have been made, but not applied. Enter  
revert apply to remove all changes that have not been saved:  
# revert  
Configuration Menu 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saving the configuration  
In addition to applying the configuration changes, you can save them to flash memory on the switch.  
IMPORTANT: If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted.  
To save the new configuration, enter the following command at any prompt:  
# save  
When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active configuration block. The  
configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. If you do  
not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block, enter the  
following instead:  
# save n  
You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. Your options  
include:  
•
•
•
The active configuration block  
The backup configuration block  
Factory default configuration block  
You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash  
memory using the diff flashcommand. It is a global command that can be executed from any  
prompt.  
For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset, see the “Selecting a  
configuration block” section in the “Boot Options Menu” chapter.  
Reminders  
CLI reminders prompt users to complete configuration tasks that require multiple steps. The default  
setting for CLI reminders is enabled. Use the following command to disable CLI reminders:  
/cfg/sys/reminders dis  
The following is an example of a configuration task performed with CLI reminders enabled.  
>> Layer 2# vlan 5  
VLAN number 5 with name "VLAN 5" created.  
Reminder: VLAN 5 needs to be enabled.  
>> VLAN 5# add 9  
Port 9 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.  
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 5 [y/n]: y  
Current ports for VLAN 5:  
Pending new ports for VLAN 5:  
empty  
9
Reminder: Port 9 needs to be enabled.  
Reminder: VLAN 5 needs to be enabled.  
Configuration Menu 110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys  
[System Menu]  
syslog  
sshd  
- Syslog Menu  
- SSH Server Menu  
radius  
- RADIUS Authentication Menu  
tacacs+ - TACACS+ Authentication Menu  
ntp  
- NTP Server Menu  
- System SNMP Menu  
- System Access Menu  
- Set system date  
- Set system time  
ssnmp  
access  
date  
time  
timezone - Set system timezone (daylight savings)  
olddst  
dlight  
idle  
notice  
bannr  
- Set system DST for US  
- Set system daylight savings  
- Set timeout for idle CLI sessions  
- Set login notice  
- Set login banner  
hprompt - Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt  
bootp  
dhcp  
- Enable/disable use of BOOTP  
- Enable/disable use of DHCP on Mgmt interface  
reminders - Enable/disable Reminders  
cur  
- Display current system-wide parameters  
This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator  
privilege mode passwords, browser-based management settings, and management access list.  
The following table describes the System Configuration Menu options.  
Table 79 System Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
syslog  
Displays the Syslog Menu.  
sshd  
Displays the SSH Server Menu.  
radius  
tacacs+  
ntp  
Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu.  
Displays the TACACS+ Menu.  
Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu.  
Displays the System SNMP Menu.  
Displays the System Access Menu.  
Prompts the user for the system date.  
Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format.  
ssnmp  
access  
date  
time  
timezone  
Configures the time zone where the switch resides. You are prompted to  
select your location (continent, country, region) by the timezone wizard.  
Once a region is selected, the switch updates the time to reflect local  
changes to Daylight Savings Time, etc.  
olddst  
Enables or disables use of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) rules in effect  
prior to the year 2007. The default value is disabled.  
Configuration Menu 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 79 System Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
dlight enable|disable  
Enables or disables daylight savings time in the system clock. When  
enabled, the switch adds an extra hour to the system clock so that it is  
consistent with the local clock. The default setting is disabled.  
idle <1-60>  
Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions, from 1 to 60 minutes. The default  
value is 5 minutes.  
This setting affects both the console port and Telnet port.  
notice <1-1024 character  
multi-line> <'-' to end>  
Displays login notice immediately before the Enter password:prompt.  
This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines.  
bannr <1-80 characters>  
Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or  
administrator logs into the switch, the login banner is displayed. It is also  
displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys/gencommand.  
hprompt disable|enable  
bootp disable|enable  
Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s  
name) in the command line interface.  
Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. If you enable BOOTP, the switch  
will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. The default  
value is enabled.  
dhcp disable|enable  
Enables or disables Dynamic Host Control Protocol for setting the  
management IP address on interface 250. When enabled, the IP  
address obtained from the DHCP server overrides the static IP  
address. The default value is enabled.  
reminders disable|enable  
cur  
Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI. The default value is  
enabled.  
Displays the current system parameters.  
System host log configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/syslog  
[Syslog Menu]  
host  
- Set IP address of first syslog host  
host2  
sever  
- Set IP address of second syslog host  
- Set the severity of first syslog host  
sever2 - Set the severity of second syslog host  
facil - Set facility of first syslog host  
facil2 - Set facility of second syslog host  
console - Enable/disable console output of syslog messages  
log  
cur  
- Enable/disable syslogging of features  
- Display current syslog settings  
Configuration Menu 112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the Syslog Configuration Menu options.  
Table 80 Syslog Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
host <IP address>  
Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. For example, 100.10.1.1.  
Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. For example, 100.10.1.2.  
host2 <IP address>  
sever <1-7>  
Sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 7,  
which means log all the severity levels.  
sever2 <1-7>  
Sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7,  
which means log all the severity levels.  
facil <1-7>  
This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. The  
range is 0-7. The default is 0.  
facil2 <1-7>  
This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The  
range is 0-7. The default is 0.  
console disable|enable  
Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. When  
necessary, disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog  
messages. It is enabled by default.  
log <feature|all>  
<enable|disable>  
Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated.  
You can choose to enable/disable specific features or enable/disable  
syslog on all available features.  
Features include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
console  
system  
mgmt  
cli  
stg  
vlan  
hotlinks  
ssh  
ntp  
ip  
web  
rmon  
ufd  
sfd  
cur  
Displays the current syslog settings.  
Configuration Menu 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure Shell Server configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/sshd  
[SSHD Menu]  
interval– Set Interval for generating the RSA server key  
scpadm – Set SCP-only admin password  
hkeygen - Generate the RSA host key  
skeygen - Generate the RSA server key  
sshport - Set SSH server port number  
ena  
dis  
on  
- Enable the SCP apply and save  
- Disable the SCP apply and save  
- Turn SSH server ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn SSH server OFF  
- Display current SSH server configuration  
Telnet traffic on the network is not secure. This menu enables Secure Shell (SSH) access from any SSH  
client. The SSH program securely logs into another computer over a network and executes commands  
in a secure environment. All data using SSH is encrypted.  
NOTE: See the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application Guide for information on SSH.  
The following table describes the SSHD Configuration Menu options.  
Table 81 SSHD Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
intrval <0-24>  
Defines interval for auto-generating the RSA server key. The switch will  
auto-generate the RSA server key at the interval defined in this command.  
The value of zero (0) means the RSA server key auto-generation is  
disabled. If the switch has been busy performing any other key generation  
and the assigned time of interval expires, the RSA server will skip  
generating the key.  
scpadm  
Defines the administrator password that is for Secure Copy (SCP) only. The  
username for this SCP administrator is scpadmin.  
Typically, SCP is used to copy files securely from one machine to another.  
In the switch, SCP is used to download and upload the switch  
configuration using secure channels.  
hkeygen  
skeygen  
Generates the RSA host keys manually. The switch creates this key  
automatically while configuring the switch with Secure Shell (SSH). But you  
can generate the key manually by using this command if you need to  
overwrite the key for security reasons. The command will take effect  
immediately without executing the apply command.  
Generates the RSA server key. The switch creates this key automatically  
while configuring the switch with Secure Shell (SSH). You can generate the  
key manually by using this command if you need to overwrite the key for  
security reasons. The command will take effect immediately without  
executing the apply command.  
sshport <TCP port number>  
Sets the SSH server port number.  
ena  
dis  
on  
Enables the SCP apply and save.  
Disables the SCP apply and save. This is the default for SCP.  
Enables the SSH server.  
Configuration Menu 114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 81 SSHD Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
off  
Disables the SSH server. This is the default for the SSH server.  
Displays the current SSH server configuration.  
cur  
RADIUS server configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/radius  
[RADIUS Server Menu]  
prisrv  
secsrv  
secret  
- Set primary RADIUS server address  
- Set secondary RADIUS server address  
- Set primary RADIUS server secret  
secret2 - Set secondary RADIUS server secret  
port - Set RADIUS port  
retries - Set RADIUS server retries  
timeout - Set RADIUS server timeout  
bckdoor - Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https  
secbd  
on  
- Enable/disable RADIUS secure backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https  
- Turn RADIUS authentication ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn RADIUS authentication OFF  
- Display current RADIUS configuration  
NOTE: See the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application Guide for information on RADIUS.  
The following table describes the RADIUS Server Configuration Menu options.  
Table 82 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prisrv <IP address>  
Sets the primary RADIUS server address.  
Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.  
This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).  
secsrv <IP address>  
secret <1-32 characters>  
secret2 <1-32 characters>  
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS  
server(s).  
port <UDP port number>  
retries <1-3>  
Enter the number of the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port to be  
configured, between 1500-3000. The default is 1645.  
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a  
different RADIUS server. The range is 1-3 requests The default is 3  
requests.  
timeout <1-10>  
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server  
authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The range is 1-10  
seconds. The default is 3 seconds.  
bckdoor enable|disable  
secbd enable|disable  
Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet/SSH/  
HTTP/HTTPS. This command does not apply when secure backdoor  
(secbd) is enabled.  
Enables or disables the RADIUS back door using secure password for  
telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. This command does not apply when  
backdoor (telnet) is enabled.  
Configuration Menu 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 82 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
on  
Enables the RADIUS server.  
off  
cur  
Disables the RADIUS server. This is the default.  
Displays the current RADIUS server parameters.  
IMPORTANT: If RADIUS is enabled, you must login using RADIUS authentication when connecting  
via the console or Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. Backdoor for console is always enabled, so you can  
connect using noradius and the administrator password even if the backdoor (telnet) or secure  
backdoor (secbd) are disabled.  
If Telnet backdoor is enabled (telnet ena), type in noradiusas a backdoor to bypass RADIUS  
checking, and use the administrator password to log into the switch. The switch allows this even if  
RADIUS servers are available.  
If secure backdoor is enabled (secbd ena), type in noradiusas a backdoor to bypass RADIUS  
checking, and use the administrator password to log into the switch. The switch allows this only if  
RADIUS servers are not available.  
TACACS+ server configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/tacacs+  
[TACACS+ Server Menu]  
prisrv - Set IP address of primary TACACS+ server  
secsrv - Set IP address of secondary TACACS+ server  
secret - Set secret for primary TACACS+ server  
secret2 - Set secret for secondary TACACS+ server  
port  
- Set TACACS+ port number  
retries - Set number of TACACS+ server retries  
timeout - Set timeout value of TACACS+ server retries  
bckdoor - Enable/disable TACACS+ back door for telnet/ssh/http/https  
secbd - Enable/disable TACACS+ secure backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https  
cmap  
- Enable/disable TACACS+ new privilege level mapping  
usermap - Set user privilege mappings  
on  
off  
cur  
- Enable TACACS+ authentication  
- Disable TACACS+ authentication  
- Display current TACACS+ settings  
TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that  
allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to  
determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. TACACS+ and Remote Authentication  
Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols are more secure than the TACACS encryption protocol.  
TACACS+ is described in RFC 1492.  
TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS, as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control  
Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Also, RADIUS combines  
authentication and authorization in a user profile, whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations.  
Configuration Menu 116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device:  
•
•
•
TACACS+ is TCP-based, so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic.  
It supports full-packet encryption, as opposed to password-only in authentication requests.  
It supports decoupled authentication, authorization, and accounting.  
The following table describes the TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu options.  
Table 83 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prisrv <IP address>  
Defines the primary TACACS+ server address.  
Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address.  
This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).  
secsrv <IP address>  
secret <1-32 characters>  
secret2 <1-32 characters>  
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the  
TACACS+ server(s).  
port <TCP port number>  
retries <1-3>  
Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1 and  
65000. The default is 49.  
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a  
different TACACS+ server. The range is 1-3 requests. The default is 3  
requests.  
timeout <4-15>  
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a TACACS+ server  
authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The range is 4-15  
seconds. The default is 5 seconds.  
bckdoor enable|disable  
Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for Telnet, SSH/SCP,  
or HTTP/HTTPS.  
Enabling this feature allows you to bypass the TACACS+ servers. It is  
recommended that you use Secure Backdoor to ensure the switch is  
secured, because Secure Backdoor disallows access through the back  
door when the TACACS+ servers are responding.  
The default value is disabled.  
secbd enable|disable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ secure back door access through Telnet,  
SSH/SCP, or HTTP/HTTPS only when the TACACS+ servers are not  
responding.  
This feature is recommended to permit access to the switch when the  
TACACS+ servers become unresponsive. If no back door is enabled, the  
only way to gain access when TACACS+ servers are unresponsive is to  
use the back door via the console port. The default value is disabled.  
cmap enable|disable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege-level mapping.  
The default value is disabled.  
usermap <0-15>  
user|oper|admin|none  
Maps a TACACS+ authorization level to a switch user level. Enter a  
TACACS+ authorization level (0-15), followed by the corresponding HP  
10GbE switch user level.  
on  
Enables the TACACS+ server.  
off  
cur  
Disables the TACACS+ server.  
Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters.  
Configuration Menu 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT: If TACACS+ is enabled, you must login using TACACS+ authentication when  
connecting via the console or Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. Backdoor for console is always enabled,  
so you can connect using notacacsand the administrator password even if the backdoor  
(bckdoor) or secure backdoor (secbd) are disabled.  
If Telnet backdoor is enabled (bckdoor ena), type notacacsas a backdoor to bypass  
TACACS+ checking, and use the administrator password to log into the switch. The switch allows  
this even if TACACS+ servers are available.  
If secure backdoor is enabled (secbd ena), type in notacacsas a backdoor to bypass  
TACACS+ checking, and use the administrator password to log into the switch. The switch allows  
this only if TACACS+ servers are not available.  
NTP server configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ntp  
[NTP Server Menu]  
prisrv - Set primary NTP server address  
secsrv - Set secondary NTP server address  
intrval - Set NTP server resync interval  
on  
- Turn NTP service ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn NTP service OFF  
- Display current NTP configuration  
This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. By  
default, this option is disabled.  
The following table describes the NTP Server Configuration Menu options.  
Table 84 NTP Server Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prisrv <IP address>  
mgt|data  
Configures the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to  
synchronize the switch clock.  
By default, the mgt option for the management port is used. To use data  
ports, specify the dataoption.  
secsrv <IP address>  
mgt|data  
Configures the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to  
synchronize the switch clock.  
intrval <1-44640>  
Specifies the interval, that is, how often, in minutes (1-44640), to  
resynchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. The default is 1440  
seconds.  
on  
Enables the NTP synchronization service.  
off  
cur  
Disables the NTP synchronization service. This is the default.  
Displays the current NTP service settings.  
Configuration Menu 118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System SNMP configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp  
[SNMP Menu]  
snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Menu  
name  
locn  
cont  
rcomm  
wcomm  
- Set SNMP "sysName"  
- Set SNMP "sysLocation"  
- Set SNMP "sysContact"  
- Set SNMP read community string  
- Set SNMP write community string  
timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine  
auth  
linkt  
ufd  
- Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap"  
- Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap  
- Enable/disable SNMP Uplink Failure Detection trap  
- Display current SNMP configuration  
cur  
The switch software supports SNMP-based network management. In SNMP model of network  
management, a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs  
(Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). If you are running an  
SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the following  
standard SNMP MIBs:  
•
•
•
MIB II (RFC 1213)  
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)  
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)  
An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP  
messages. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or  
to modify.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNMP parameters that can be modified include:  
System name  
System location  
System contact  
Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function  
Read community string  
Write community string  
The following table describes the System SNMP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 85 System SNMP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
snmpv3  
Displays SNMPv3 menu.  
name <1-64 characters>  
locn <1-64 characters>  
cont <1-64 characters>  
rcomm <1-32 characters>  
Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64  
characters.  
Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a  
maximum of 64 characters.  
Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a  
maximum of 64 characters.  
Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string  
controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32  
characters. The default read community string is public.  
Configuration Menu 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 85 System SNMP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
wcomm <1-32 characters>  
Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string  
controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. It can have a  
maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private.  
timeout <1-30>  
Sets the timeout value for the SNMP state machine. The range is 1-30  
minutes. The default value is 5 minutes.  
auth disable|enable  
Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The  
default setting is disabled.  
linkt <port>  
[disable|enable]  
Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The  
default setting is enabled.  
ufd  
cur  
Enables or disables the sending of Uplink Failure Detection traps. The  
default setting is disabled.  
Displays the current SNMP configuration.  
SNMPv3 configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3  
[SNMPv3 Menu]  
usm  
view  
- usmUser Table Menu  
- vacmViewTreeFamily Table Menu  
access - vacmAccess Table Menu  
group  
comm  
taddr  
- vacmSecurityToGroup Table Menu  
- community Table Menu  
- targetAddr Table Menu  
tparam - targetParams Table Menu  
notify - notify Table Menu  
v1v2  
cur  
- Enable/disable V1/V2 access  
- Display current SNMPv3 configuration  
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2  
Framework by supporting the following:  
•
•
•
•
a new SNMP message format  
security for messages  
access control  
remote configuration of SNMP parameters  
For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please see RFC2271 to RFC2275.  
Configuration Menu 120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Configuration Menu options.  
Table 86 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
usm <1-16>  
Configures a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. You can  
also configure this entry through SNMP. The range is 1-16.  
view <1-128>  
access <1-32>  
Configures different MIB views. The range is 1-128.  
Configures access rights. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of  
services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. You  
need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request  
from an SNMP entity. The range is 1-32.  
group <1-16>  
comm <1-16>  
Configures an SNMP group. A group maps the user name to the access group  
names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. A  
group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular  
group. The range is 1-16.  
Configures a community table entry. The community table contains objects for  
mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters.  
The range is 1-16.  
taddr <1-16>  
tparam <1-16>  
Configures the destination address and user security levels for outgoing  
notifications. This is also called the transport endpoint. The range is 1-16.  
Configures SNMP parameters, consisting of message processing model, security  
model, security level, and security name information. There may be multiple  
transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters, or a  
particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP  
parameters.  
notify <1-16>  
Configures a notification index. A notification application typically monitors a  
system for particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class  
messages based on these events or conditions. The range is 1-16.  
v1v2 disable|enable  
cur  
Enables or disables the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. This command  
is enabled by default.  
Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.  
User Security Model configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm  
[SNMPv3 usmUser 1 Menu]  
name  
auth  
- Set USM user name  
- Set authentication protocol  
authpw - Set authentication password  
priv - Set privacy protocol  
privpw - Set privacy password  
del  
cur  
- Delete usmUser entry  
- Display current usmUser configuration  
You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. An SNMP engine must  
have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user.  
This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. You need to provide a  
security name to create the USM entry.  
Configuration Menu 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table describes the User Security Model Configuration Menu options.  
Table 87 User Security Model Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32 characters>  
Configures a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the  
user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch.  
auth md5|sha|none  
authpw  
Configures the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-  
SHA-96. The default algorithm is none.  
Configures your password for authentication. If you selected an authentication  
algorithm using the above command, you need to provide a password;  
otherwise you will get an error message during validation.  
priv des|none  
Configures the type of privacy protocol on the switch. The privacy protocol  
protects messages from disclosure. The options are des(CBC-DES Symmetric  
Encryption Protocol) or none. If you specify desas the privacy protocol, then  
be sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or  
HMAC-SHA-96). If you select noneas the authentication protocol, you will get  
an error message.  
privpw  
del  
Configures the privacy password.  
Deletes the USM user entries.  
Displays the USM user entries.  
cur  
SNMPv3 View configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view  
[SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu]  
name  
tree  
mask  
type  
del  
- Set view name  
- Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees  
- Set view mask  
- Set view type  
- Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry  
- Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration  
cur  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu options.  
Table 88 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32  
characters>  
Defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters.  
tree <1-64  
characters>  
Defines the Object Identifier (OID), a string which, when combined with the  
corresponding mask, defines a family of view subtrees.  
An example of an OID is 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0  
mask <1-32  
characters>  
Defines the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a  
family of view subtrees. The mask can have a maximum of 32 characters.  
type  
Selects whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree  
and vacmViewTreeFamilyMaskdefine a family of view subtrees, which is  
included in or excluded from the MIB view.  
included|excluded  
Configuration Menu 122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 88 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
del  
Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamilygroup entry.  
cur  
Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamilyconfiguration.  
View-based Access Control Model configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access  
[SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu]  
name  
model  
level  
rview  
wview  
nview  
del  
- Set group name  
- Set security model  
- Set minimum level of security  
- Set read view index  
- Set write view index  
- Set notify view index  
- Delete vacmAccess entry  
- Display current vacmAccess configuration  
cur  
The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for  
checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP  
retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.  
The following table describes the User Access Control Configuration Menu options.  
Table 89 View-based Access Control Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32 characters>  
Defines the name of the group, up to a maximum of 32 characters.  
Selects the security model to be used.  
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2  
level  
Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level  
noAuthNoPrivmeans that the SNMP message will be sent without  
authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv  
means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without  
using a privacy protocol. The authPrivmeans that the SNMP message will  
be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.  
noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv  
|authPriv  
rview <1-32 characters>  
wview <1-32 characters>  
nview <1-32 characters>  
Defines a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to  
a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view  
having this value then no access is granted.  
Defines a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to  
the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having  
this value then no access is granted.  
Defines a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to  
the MIB view.  
del  
cur  
Deletes the View-based Access Control entry.  
Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.  
Configuration Menu 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 Group configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group  
[SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu]  
model  
uname  
gname  
del  
- Set security model  
- Set USM user name  
- Set group name  
- Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry  
- Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration  
cur  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu options.  
Table 90 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2  
Defines the security model.  
uname <1-32 characters>  
Sets the user name as defined in  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name. The user name can have a  
maximum of 32 characters.  
gname <1-32 characters>  
Configures the name for the access group as defined in  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name. The group name can have  
a maximum of 32 characters.  
del  
cur  
Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroupentry.  
Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroupconfiguration.  
SNMPv3 Community Table configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm  
[SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu]  
index  
name  
uname  
tag  
- Set community index  
- Set community string  
- Set USM user name  
- Set community tag  
del  
cur  
- Delete communityTable entry  
- Display current communityTable configuration  
This command is used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the  
community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local  
Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu options.  
Table 91 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
index <1-32  
characters>  
Configures the unique index value of a row in this table. The index can have a  
maximum of 32 characters.  
name <1-32 characters>  
Configures the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name.  
The name can have a maximum of 32 characters.  
uname <1-32  
characters>  
Defines a readable 32 character string that represents the corresponding  
value of an SNMP community name in a security model.  
Configuration Menu 124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 91 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
tag <1-255 characters>  
Configures a tag of up to 255 characters maximum. This tag specifies a set of  
transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an  
SNMP trap.  
del  
cur  
Deletes the community table entry.  
Displays the community table configuration.  
SNMPv3 Target Address Table configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr  
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu]  
name  
addr  
port  
- Set target address name  
- Set target transport address IP  
- Set target transport address port  
taglist - Set tag list  
pname  
del  
- Set targetParams name  
- Delete targetAddrTable entry  
cur  
- Display current targetAddrTable configuration  
This menu allows you to set passwords and display current user statistics. Passwords can be a  
maximum of 15 characters. To disable a user, set the password to null by simply pressing the Enter  
key when prompted for the password.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu options.  
Table 92 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32 characters>  
Configures the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target address  
name associated with this entry.  
addr <transport address ip>  
Configures a transport address IP that can be used in the generation  
of SNMP traps.  
port <transport address port  
(1-65535)>  
Configures a transport address port that can be used in the  
generation of SNMP traps.  
taglist <1-255 characters>  
pname <1-32 characters>  
Configures a list of tags (up to 255 characters maximum) that are  
used to select target addresses for a particular operation.  
Defines the name as defined in  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name.  
del  
cur  
Deletes the Target Address Table entry.  
Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.  
Configuration Menu 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam  
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu]  
name  
- Set targetParams name  
mpmodel - Set message processing model  
model  
uname  
level  
del  
- Set security model  
- Set USM user name  
- Set minimum level of security  
- Delete targetParamsTable entry  
- Display current targetParamsTable configuration  
cur  
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP  
engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The parameters include  
the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for  
example: USM), the security name, and the security level (noAuthnoPriv,authNoPriv, or  
authPriv).  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu options.  
Table 93 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32 characters>  
Configures the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier that is associated with  
this entry.  
mpmodel  
snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3  
Configures the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP  
messages.  
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2  
Selects the security model to be used when generating the SNMP  
messages.  
uname <1-32 characters>  
Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table, on whose behalf  
the SNMP messages are generated using this entry.  
level  
Selects the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP  
messages using this entry. The level noAuthNoPrivmeans that the SNMP  
message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy  
protocol. The level authNoPrivmeans that the SNMP message will be  
sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The  
authPrivmeans that the SNMP message will be sent both with  
authentication and using a privacy protocol.  
noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|  
authPriv  
del  
cur  
Deletes the targetParamsTableentry.  
Displays the current targetParamsTableconfiguration.  
Configuration Menu 126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMPv3 Notify Table configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify  
[SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu]  
name  
tag  
del  
cur  
- Set notify name  
- Set notify tag  
- Delete notifyTable entry  
- Display current notifyTable configuration  
SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. A notification typically monitors a system for  
particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or  
conditions.  
The following table describes the SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration menu options.  
Table 94 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32 characters>  
Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP  
notify entry.  
tag <1-255 characters>  
Defines a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is  
used to select entries in the Target Address Table. Any entry in the  
snmpTargetAddrTable, that matches the value of this tag, is selected.  
del  
cur  
Deletes the notify table entry.  
Displays the current notify table configuration.  
System Access configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/access  
[System Access Menu]  
mgmt  
user  
http  
https  
wport  
snmp  
tsbbi  
tnet  
- Management Network Definition Menu  
- User Access Control Menu (passwords)  
- Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access  
- HTTPS Web Access Menu  
- Set HTTP (Web) server port number  
- Set SNMP access control  
- Enable/disable telnet/ssh configuration from BBI  
- Enable/disable Telnet access  
tnport - Set Telnet server port number  
tport  
cur  
- Set the TFTP Port for the system  
- Display current system access configuration  
The following table describes the System Access Configuration menu options.  
Table 95 System Access Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
mgmt  
Displays the Management Configuration Menu.  
Displays the User Access Control Menu.  
user  
http disable|enable  
Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser-based Interface. It is  
enabled by default.  
https  
Displays the HTTPS Menu.  
Configuration Menu 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 95 System Access Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
wport <TCP port number>  
Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is  
HTTP port 80.  
snmp disable|read-  
only|read-write  
Disables or provides read-only/write-read SNMP access.  
tsbbi enable|disable  
tnet disable|enable  
Enables or disables BBI configuration control s for Telnet and SSH.  
Enables or disables Telnet access. You see this command only if you are  
connected to the switch through a serial connection. The default setting is  
enabled.  
tnport <TCP port number>  
tport <TFTP port number>  
cur  
Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens  
for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.  
Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens  
for TFTP sessions on a non-standard port.  
Displays the current system access parameters.  
Management Networks configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/access/mgmt  
[Management Networks Menu]  
add  
- Add mgmt network definition  
rem  
- Remove mgmt network definition  
cur  
clear  
- Display current mgmt network definitions  
- Clear current mgmt network definitions  
The following table describes the Management Networks Configuration menu options. You can  
configure up to 10 management networks on the switch.  
Table 96 Management Network Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <IP address> <IP mask>  
Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through  
Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the browser-based interface. A range of IP  
addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify  
an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.  
rem <IP address> <IP mask>  
Removes a defined network, which consists of a management network  
address and a management network mask address.  
cur  
Displays the current management networks parameters.  
Clears the management network definitions.  
clear  
Configuration Menu 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Access Control configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/access/user  
[User Access Control Menu]  
uid  
- User ID Menu  
eject  
usrpw  
opw  
admpw  
cur  
- Eject user  
- Set user password (user)  
- Set operator password (oper)  
- Set administrator password (admin)  
- Display current user status  
The following table describes the User Access Control menu options.  
Table 97 User Access Control Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
uid <1-10>  
Displays the User ID Menu for the selected user.  
Ejects the selected user from the switch.  
eject <username>  
usrpw <1-128 characters>  
Sets the user (user) password (maximum 128 characters). The user has no  
direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view switch  
status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration  
changes.  
opw <1-128 characters>  
admpw <1-128 characters>  
Sets the operator (oper) password (maximum 128 characters). The  
operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she can view all switch  
information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch.  
Sets the administrator (admin) password (maximum 128 characters). The  
super user administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and  
configuration commands on the switch, including the ability to change both  
the user and administrator passwords.  
cur  
Displays the current user status.  
User ID configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/access/user/uid  
[User ID 1 Menu]  
cos  
name  
pswd  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Set class of service  
- Set user name  
- Set user password  
- Enable user ID  
- Disable user ID  
- Delete user ID  
- Display current user configuration  
The following table describes the User ID Configuration menu options.  
Table 98 User ID Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
cos <user|oper|admin>  
Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level.  
Defines the user name.  
name <1-8 characters>  
pswd <1-128 characters>  
Sets the user password of up to 128 characters maximum.  
Configuration Menu 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 98 User ID Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
ena  
Enables the user ID.  
dis  
del  
cur  
Disables the user ID.  
Deletes the user ID.  
Displays the current user ID parameters.  
HTTPS Access configuration  
Command: /cfg/sys/access/https  
[https Menu]  
access - Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access  
port - HTTPS WebServer port number  
generate - Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate  
certSave - save HTTPS certificate  
cur  
- Display current SSL Web Access configuration  
The following table describes the HTTPS Access Configuration Menu options.  
Table 99 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
access enable|disable  
Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. The default value is  
disabled.  
port <TCP port number>  
Defines the HTTPS Web server port number.  
generate  
Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during  
the key exchange. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for  
the first time. The user can create a new certificate defining the information  
that they want to be used in the various fields. For example:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA  
State or Province Name (full name) [ ]: Ontario  
Locality Name (for example, city) [ ]: Ottawa  
Organization Name (for example, company) [ ]: Hewlett-Packard  
Organizational Unit Name (for example, section) [ ]: ProLiant  
Common Name (for example, user’s name) [ ]: Mr Smith  
Email (for example, email address) [ ]: [email protected]  
You must confirm if you want to generate the certificate. It takes approximately  
30 seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch restarts SSL agent.  
certSave  
cur  
Allows the client, or the Web browser, to accept the certificate and save the  
certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted.  
Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration.  
Configuration Menu 130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port configuration  
Command: /cfg/port <port number>  
[Port 1 Menu]  
gig  
- Gig Phy Menu  
aclqos - Acl/Qos Configuration Menu  
stp - STP Menu - for PVRST only  
8021ppri - Set default 802.1p priority  
pvid  
name  
rmon  
tag  
- Set default port VLAN id  
- Set port name  
- Enable/Disable RMON for port  
- Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port  
tagpvid - Enable/disable tagging on pvid  
brate  
mrate  
drate  
ena  
- Set BroadCast Threshold  
- Set MultiCast Threshold  
- Set Dest. Lookup Fail Threshold  
- Enable port  
dis  
- Disable port  
cur  
- Display current port configuration  
This menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports. This command is enabled by  
default.  
NOTE: Port 17 is reserved for switch management.  
The following table describes the Port Configuration Menu options.  
Table 100 Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
gig  
Displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.  
aclqos  
Displays the Access Control List (ACL)/Quality of Service (QoS) configuration  
menu.  
stp  
Displays the port PVRST menu.  
8021ppri  
pvid <1-4094>  
Configures the port’s 802.1p priority level.  
Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are  
not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1.  
VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch management.  
name <1-64  
characters>|none  
Sets a name for the port (maximum 64 characters). The assigned port name  
displays next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.  
rmon enable|disable  
tag enable|disable  
Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port. RMON must be enabled  
for any RMON configurations to function.  
Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default.  
tagpvid  
enable|disable  
Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence. When disabled, the VLAN tag is  
removed from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID. The default  
value is enabled.  
brate <0-262143>|dis  
Limits the number of broadcast packets per second to the specified value. If  
disabled (dis), the port forwards all broadcast packets.  
Configuration Menu 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 100 Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
mrate <0-262143>|dis  
Limits the number of multicast packets per second to the specified value. If  
disabled (dis), the port forwards all multicast packets.  
drate <0-262143>|dis  
Limits the number of unknown unicast packets per second to the specified value.  
If disabled (dis), the port forwards all unknown unicast packets.  
ena  
dis  
Enables the port.  
Disables the port. To temporarily disable a port without changing its  
configuration attributes, see the “Temporarily disabling a port” section later in  
this chapter.  
cur  
Displays current port parameters.  
Temporarily disabling a port  
To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes, enter the following  
command at any prompt:  
Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis  
Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to use applyor  
save.The port state will revert to its original configuration when the switch is reset. See the “Menu  
information” section in the “Operations Menu” chapter for other operations-level commands.  
Port link configuration  
Command: /cfg/port <port number>/gig  
[Gigabit Link Menu]  
speed - Set link speed  
mode  
fctl  
auto  
cur  
- Set full or half duplex mode  
- Set flow control  
- Set auto negotiation  
- Display current gig link configuration  
Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.  
Link menu options are described in the following table and display on the Gigabit port configuration  
menus for the switch. Using these configuration menus, you can set port parameters such as speed,  
duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link.  
Configuration Menu 132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the Gigabit Link Configuration Menu options.  
Table 101 Gigabit Link Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
speed 100|10000  
Sets the link speed.  
All downlink and uplink ports are fixed at 10000 Mbps, and cannot be  
changed. Management port 17 is fixed at 100 Mbps.  
mode  
Sets the operating mode, as follows:  
•
Full-duplex  
All ports are fixed at full duplex, and cannot be changed.  
fctl rx|tx|both|none  
Sets the flow control. The choices include:  
•
•
•
•
Receive (rx) flow control  
Transmit (tx) flow control  
Both receive and transmit flow control (default)  
No flow control  
Management port 17 is fixed at both, and cannot be changed.  
auto on|off  
Enables or disables auto-negotiation for the port.  
All downlink and uplink ports are fixed at 10000 Mbps, and cannot be set to  
auto-negotiate.  
cur  
Displays current port parameters.  
Port ACL/QoS configuration  
Command: /cfg/port <port number>/aclqos  
[Port 20 ACL Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add ACL or ACL group to this port  
- Remove ACL or ACL group from this port  
- Display current ACLs for this port  
The following table describes the port ACL/QoS Configuration Menu options.  
Table 102 Port ACL/QoS Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add acl <1-384>| grp <1-384>  
Assigns an ACL or ACL Group to the port.  
Removes an ACL or ACL Group from the port.  
Displays current port ACL/QoS parameters.  
rem acl <1-384>| grp <1-384>  
cur  
Configuration Menu 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port PVRST configuration  
Command: /cfg/port <port number>/stp  
[Port 1 STP Menu]  
edge  
link  
- Enable/disable edge port (for PVRST only)  
- Set port link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)  
(for PVRST only)  
cur  
- Display current port stp configuration  
The following table describes the port PVRST Configuration Menu options.  
Table 103 Port PVRST Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
edge enable|disable  
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not  
connected to a bridge, and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the  
link is up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). The default  
value is enabled.  
link auto|p2p|shared  
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:  
• auto—Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically  
match its settings.  
• p2p—Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol.  
• shared—Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually  
a hub).  
The default link type is auto.  
cur  
Displays current port PVRST parameters.  
Configuration Menu 134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Layer 2 configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2  
[Layer 2 Menu]  
8021x  
mrst  
stp  
- 802.1X Menu  
- Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu  
- Spanning Tree Menu  
fdb  
- FDB Menu  
trunk  
thash  
lacp  
- Trunk Group Menu  
- IP Trunk Hash Menu  
- Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu  
hotlink - Hot Links Menu  
vlan - VLAN Menu  
pvstcomp - Enable/Disable PVST+ compatibility mode  
bpdugrd - Enable/disable BPDU Guard  
upfast - Enable/disable Uplink Fast  
update - UplinkFast station update rate  
cur  
- Display current layer 2 parameters  
The following table describes the Layer 2 Configuration Menu options.  
Table 104 L2 Configuration Menu options  
Command  
8021x  
Description  
Displays the 802.1X Configuration Menu.  
mrst  
Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  
Configuration Menu.  
stp  
Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Forwarding Database Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu for the selected trunk.  
Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu.  
fdb  
trunk <1-12>  
thash  
lacp  
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu.  
Displays the Hot Links Configuration Menu.  
hotlink  
vlan <1-4094>  
Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu.  
pvstcomp  
enable|disable  
Enables or disables VLAN tagging of spanning tree BPDUs. The default value  
is enabled.  
bpdugrd enable|disable  
upfast enable|disable  
Enables or disables BPDU guard, to avoid spanning-tree loops on ports with  
Port Fast Forwarding enabled.  
Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence, which provides rapid Spanning  
Tree convergence to an upstream switch during failover.  
When enabled, this feature increases bridge priorities to 65500 for all STGs  
and path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports.  
update <10-200>  
Configures the station update rate, in packets per second.  
The range is 10-200. The default value is 40.  
cur  
Displays current Layer 2 parameters.  
Configuration Menu 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
802.1X configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/8021x  
[802.1X Configuration Menu]  
global - Global 802.1X configuration menu  
port  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Port 802.1X configuration menu  
- Enable 802.1X access control  
- Disable 802.1X access control  
- Show 802.1X configuration  
This feature allows you to configure the HP 10GbE switch as an IEEE 802.1X Authenticator, to  
provide port-based network access control. The following table describes the 802.1X Configuration  
Menu options.  
Table 105 802.1X Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
global  
Displays the global 802.1X Configuration Menu.  
Displays the 802.1X Port Menu.  
Globally enables 802.1X.  
port <port number>  
ena  
dis  
cur  
Globally disables 802.1X.  
Displays current 802.1X parameters.  
Configuration Menu 136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
802.1X Global configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/8021x/global  
[802.1X Global Configuration Menu]  
mode  
- Set access control mode  
qtperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval  
txperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout  
suptmout - Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout  
svrtmout - Set server authentication request timeout  
maxreq - Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions  
raperiod - Set reauthentication time interval  
reauth - Set reauthentication status to on or off  
default - Restore default 802.1X configuration  
cur  
- Display current 802.1X configuration  
The global 802.1X menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all ports in the switch (except  
management port 17). The following table describes the 802.1X Global Configuration Menu options.  
Table 106 802.1X Global Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
mode force-  
unauth|auto|force-  
auth  
Sets the type of access control for all ports:  
• force-unauth- the port is unauthorized unconditionally.  
• auto- the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the  
RADIUS server.  
• force-auth- the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all traffic.  
The default value is force-auth.  
qtperiod <0-65535>  
txperiod <1-65535>  
suptmout <1-65535>  
svrtmout <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-  
Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in  
the previous round of authentication. The default value is 60 seconds.  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity  
frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity  
frame. The default value is 30 seconds.  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet  
from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet from the  
authentication server. The default value is 30 seconds.  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the Radius  
server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30  
seconds.  
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet  
containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the  
current setting of /cfg/sys/radius/timeout(default is 3 seconds).  
maxreq <1-10>  
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request  
packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is 2.  
raperiod <1-604800>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a  
supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. The default value  
is 3600 seconds.  
reauth on|off  
default  
cur  
Sets the re-authentication status to onor off. The default value is off.  
Resets the global 802.1X parameters to their default values.  
Displays current global 802.1X parameters.  
Configuration Menu 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
802.1X Port configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/8021x/port <port number>  
[802.1X Port Configuration Menu]  
mode  
- Set access control mode  
qtperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval  
txperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout  
suptmout - Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout  
svrtmout - Set server authentication request timeout  
maxreq - Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions  
raperiod - Set reauthentication time interval  
reauth - Set reauthentication status to on or off  
default - Restore default 802.1X configuration  
global - Apply current global 802.1X configuration to this port  
cur  
- Display current 802.1X configuration  
The 802.1X port menu allows you to configure parameters that affect the selected port in the switch.  
These settings override the global 802.1X parameters.  
The following table describes the 802.1X Port Configuration Menu options.  
Table 107 802.1X Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
mode force-  
unauth|auto|force-  
auth  
Sets the type of access control for the port:  
• force-unauth—the port is unauthorized unconditionally.  
• auto—the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the  
RADIUS server.  
• force-auth—the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all traffic.  
The default value is force-auth.  
qtperiod <0-65535>  
txperiod <1-65535>  
suptmout <1-65535>  
svrtmout <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-  
Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure  
in the previous round of authentication. The default value is 60 seconds.  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity  
frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity  
frame. The default value is 30 seconds.  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet  
from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet from  
the authentication server. The default value is 30 seconds.  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the  
RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is  
30 seconds.  
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet  
containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the  
current setting of /cfg/sys/radius/timeout(default is 3 seconds).  
maxreq <1-10>  
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request  
packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is 2.  
raperiod <1-604800>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a  
supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. The default value  
is 3600 seconds.  
Configuration Menu 138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 107 802.1X Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
reauth on|off  
Sets the re-authentication status to onor off. The default value is off.  
Resets the global 802.1X parameters to their default values.  
Applies the global 802.1X parameters to the port.  
Displays current 802.1X parameters.  
default  
global  
cur  
Configuration Menu 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/  
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/mrst  
[Multiple Spanning Tree Menu]  
cist  
name  
rev  
- Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu  
- Set MST region name  
- Set revision level of this MST region  
maxhop - Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 - 60)  
mode  
on  
off  
cur  
- Spanning Tree Mode  
- Globally turns RSTP/MSTP ON  
- Globally turns RSTP/MSTP OFF  
- Display current MST parameters  
The switch supports the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and IEEE 802.1s Multiple  
Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small number of spanning  
tree groups, each with its own topology.  
MSTP supports up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups on the switch (STG 32 is reserved for switch  
management). MRST is turned off by default.  
NOTE: When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on, VLAN 1 is moved from Spanning Tree Group 1  
to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off, VLAN 1  
is moved back to Spanning Tree Group 1.  
The following table describes the Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options.  
Table 108 Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
cist  
Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) Menu.  
name <1-32  
characters>  
Configures a name for the MSTP region. All devices within a MSTP region must have  
the same region name.  
rev <0-65535>  
Configures the revision level for the MSTP region. The revision level is used as a  
numerical identifier for the region. All devices within a MSTP region must have the  
same revision level number. The default value is 1.  
maxhop <4-60>  
Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may to traverse before it is  
dropped. The range is from 4 to 60 hops. The default value is 20.  
rstp|mstp|pvrst  
Selects the spanning-tree mode, as follows:  
•
•
•
Multiple Spanning Tree mode (mst)  
Rapid Spanning Tree mode (rstp)  
Per-VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (pvrst)  
The default mode is RSTP.  
on  
Globally turn RSTP/MSTP ON.  
When RSTP is turned on, the configuration parameters for STP group 1 apply to RSTP.  
off  
cur  
Globally turn RSTP/MSTP OFF.  
Displays the current RSTP/MSTP configuration.  
Configuration Menu 140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
•
IEEE 802.1w standard-based RSTP implementation runs on one STG (i.e. same as one spanning tree  
instance) only. As a result, if ‘rstp’ mode is selected under the /cfg/mrst/modecommand, then only a  
single RSTP instance (default for STG 1) is supported for all VLANs, including the Default VLAN 1.  
•
If multiple spanning tree instances are required, then select ‘mstp’ mode so that multiple VLANs are handled  
by multiple spanning tree instances, as specified by IEEE 802.1s standard-based MSTP implementation.  
•
•
IEEE 802.1s MSTP supports rapid convergence using IEEE 802.1w RSTP.  
PVST+ does not support rapid convergence in current versions.  
NOTE:  
The following configurations are unsupported:  
•
•
HP PVST+ (default Spanning Tree setting) is NOT interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+.  
HP MSTP/RSTP (with mode set to either ‘mstp’ or ‘rstp’) is NOT interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+.  
The following configurations are supported:  
•
•
HP PVST+ (default Spanning Tree setting) is interoperable with Cisco PVST+.  
HP MSTP/RSTP (with mode set to ‘mstp’) is interoperable with Cisco MST/RSTP.  
Common Internal Spanning Tree configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/mrst/cist  
[Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu]  
brg  
port  
add  
- CIST Bridge parameter menu  
- CIST Port parameter menu  
- Add VLAN(s) to CIST  
default - Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters  
cur - Display current CIST parameters  
The Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and  
with devices running different Spanning Tree instances. It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0.  
The following table describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree  
Configuration Menu options.  
Table 109 Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
brg  
Displays the CIST Bridge Menu.  
Displays the CIST Port Menu.  
port <port number>  
add <1-4095>  
Adds VLANs to the CIST. Enter one VLAN per line, and press Enter to add the  
VLANs.  
default  
cur  
Resets all CIST parameters to their default values.  
Displays the current CIST configuration.  
Configuration Menu 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CIST bridge configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg  
[CIST Bridge Menu]  
prior - Set CIST bridge Priority (0-65535)  
mxage - Set CIST bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)  
fwd  
cur  
- Set CIST bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)  
- Display current CIST bridge parameters  
CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP mode. CIST parameters do not  
affect operation of STP/PVST.  
The following table describes the commands used to configure CIST Bridge Configuration Menu  
options parameters.  
Table 110 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prior <0-65535>  
Configures the CIST bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which  
bridge on the network is the MSTP root bridge.  
To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other  
switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge  
priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.  
This command does not apply to RSTP. See the "Bridge Spanning Tree configuration"  
section for more information.  
mxage <6-40>  
fwd <4-30>  
cur  
Configures the CIST bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the  
maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data  
unit before it reconfigures the MSTP network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the  
default is 20 seconds.  
This command does not apply to RSTP. See the "Bridge Spanning Tree configuration"  
section for more information.  
Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter  
specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the  
listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state.  
The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is 15 seconds.  
This command does not apply to RSTP. See the "Bridge Spanning Tree configuration"  
section for more information.  
Displays the current CIST bridge configuration.  
Configuration Menu 142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CIST port configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port <port number>  
[CIST Port 1 Menu]  
prior - Set port Priority (0-240)  
cost  
- Set port Path Cost (1-200000000)  
hello - Set CIST port Hello Time (1-10 secs)  
link  
edge  
on  
- Set MSTP link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)  
- Enables or disables this port as an edge port  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF  
- Display current port Spanning Tree parameters  
CIST port parameters are used to modify MRST operation on an individual port basis. CIST  
parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST.  
For each port, CIST is turned on by default. Port parameters include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port priority  
Port path cost  
Port Hello time  
Link type  
Edge  
On and off  
Current port configuration  
The portoption of MRST is turned on by default.  
The following table describes the commands used to configure CIST Port Configuration Menu options.  
Table 111 CIST Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prior <0-240>  
Configures the CIST port priority. The port priority helps determine which  
bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has  
multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the  
lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The  
range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...), and the default is 128.  
cost <1-200000000>  
hello <1-10>  
Configures the CIST port path cost. The port path cost is used to help  
determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the  
faster the port, the lower the path cost. The default for Gigabit ports is  
20000, and for 10Gb ports is 2000.  
Configures the CIST port Hello time. The Hello time specifies how often the  
root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any  
bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value. The  
range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.  
link auto|p2p|shared  
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:  
• auto—Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically  
match its settings.  
• p2p—Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol.  
• shared—Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a  
hub).  
The default link type is auto.  
Configuration Menu 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 111 CIST Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
edge disable|enable  
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not  
connected to a bridge, and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link  
is up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). This command is  
disabled by default.  
on  
Enables CIST on the port.  
off  
cur  
Disables CIST on the port.  
Displays the current CIST port configuration.  
Spanning Tree configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/stp <1-128>  
[Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu]  
brg  
- Bridge parameter menu  
port  
add  
- Port parameter menu  
- Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group  
remove - Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group  
clear - Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group  
on  
off  
- Globally turn Spanning Tree ON  
- Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF  
default - Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters  
cur - Display current bridge parameters  
The HP 10GbE switch supports the IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Cisco proprietary  
PVST and PVST+ protocols. You can configure up to 127 spanning tree groups on the switch (STG  
128 is reserved for switch management). Spanning Tree is turned on by default.  
NOTE: When RSTP is turned on, only STP group 1 can be configured.  
The following table describes the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options.  
Table 112 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
brg  
Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu.  
Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu.  
port <port number>  
add <1-4094>  
Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a  
parameter.  
remove <1-4094>  
Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an  
external VLAN ID as a parameter.  
clear  
on  
Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree.  
Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol.  
off  
Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol.  
default  
Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration.  
Configuration Menu 144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 112 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
cur  
Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.  
Bridge Spanning Tree configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/stp/brg  
[Bridge Spanning Tree Menu]  
prior - Set bridge Priority [0-65535]  
hello - Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs]  
mxage - Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)  
fwd  
cur  
- Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)  
- Display current bridge parameters  
Spanning tree bridge parameters can be configured for each Spanning Tree Group. STP bridge  
parameters include:  
•
•
•
•
•
Bridge priority  
Bridge hello time  
Bridge maximum age  
Forwarding delay  
Current bridge configuration  
The following table describes the Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options.  
Table 113 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prior <0-65535>  
Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge  
on the network is the STP root bridge.  
To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other  
switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge  
priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.  
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 61440, in steps of 4096 (0, 4096, 8192...), and the  
default is 32768.  
This command does not apply to MSTP. See the “Common Internal Spanning Tree  
configuration” section for more information.  
hello <1-10>  
Configures the bridge hello time. The hello time specifies how often the root bridge  
transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).  
Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The range is 1  
to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.  
This command does not apply to MSTP. See the “Common Internal Spanning Tree  
configuration” section for more information.  
mxage <6-40>  
Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the  
maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol  
data unit before it reconfigures the STP network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and  
the default is 20 seconds.  
This command does not apply to MSTP. See the “Common Internal Spanning Tree  
configuration” section for more information.  
Configuration Menu 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 113 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
fwd <4-30>  
Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter  
specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the  
listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state.  
The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is 15 seconds.  
This command does not apply to MSTP. See the “Common Internal Spanning Tree  
configuration” section for more information.  
cur  
Displays the current bridge STP parameters.  
When configuring STP bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used:  
•
•
2*(fwd-1) ≥ mxage  
2*(hello+1) ≤ mxage  
Spanning Tree port configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/stp <1-128>/port <port number>  
[Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu]  
prior - Set port Priority (0-255)  
cost  
- Set port Path Cost (1-65535 (802.1d) /  
1-200000000 (MSTP/RSTP)/0 for auto)  
link  
edge  
- Set port link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)  
- Enables or disables this port as an edge port  
fastfwd - Enable/disable Port Fast Forwarding mode  
on  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF  
- Display current port Spanning Tree parameters  
The default configuration for STP/PVST+ is off for downlink ports (1-16) and the management port  
(17), and on for uplink ports (18-21). The default configuration for RSTP/MSTP is Spanning Tree off  
for all downlink ports (1-16) and the management port (17), and on for all uplink ports (18-21), with  
downlink ports configured as edge ports.  
Spanning tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. STP port  
parameters include:  
•
•
Port priority  
Port path cost  
Configuration Menu 146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table describes the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu options.  
Table 114 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prior <0-255>  
Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge  
port becomes the designated port.  
In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single  
segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port  
for the segment.  
The range is 0 to 255, and the default is 128.  
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...) and the  
default is 128.  
cost <1-65535>  
Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the  
designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the  
lower the path cost.  
The range is 1 to 65535. The default is 100 for 10Mb ports, 10 for 100 Mb  
ports, 4 for Gigabit ports, and 2 for 10Gb ports.  
A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto-  
negotiated link speed.  
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 1 – 200000000, and the default it 20000 for  
Gigabit ports, 2000 for 10Gb ports.  
link auto|p2p|shared  
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:  
• auto—Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically  
match its settings.  
• p2p—Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol.  
• shared—Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a  
hub).  
This command only applies when RSTP is turned on. See the “Common  
Internal Spanning Tree configuration” section for more information.  
edge disable|enable  
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not connected  
to a bridge, and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up.  
Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled).  
This command only applies when RSTP is turned on. See the “Common  
Internal Spanning Tree configuration” section for more information.  
fastfwd disable|enable  
Enables or disables Port Fast Forward on the port.  
Enables STP on the port.  
on  
off  
cur  
Disables STP on the port.  
Displays the current STP port parameters.  
Configuration Menu 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Forwarding Database configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/fdb  
[FDB Menu]  
static - Static FDB Menu  
aging  
cur  
- Configure FDB aging value  
- Display current FDB configuration  
The following table describes the Forwarding Database Configuration Menu options.  
Table 115 FDB Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
static  
Displays the Static FDB Configuration Menu.  
Configures the aging value for FDB entries. The default value is 300.  
Displays current FDB parameters.  
aging <0-65535>  
cur  
Static FDB configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/fdb/static  
[Static FDB Menu]  
add  
- Add a permanent FDB entry  
del  
- Delete a static FDB entry  
clear  
cur  
- Clear static FDB entries  
- Display current static FDB configuration  
The following table describes the Static FDB Configuration Menu options.  
Table 116 Static FDB Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <MAC address> <VLAN>  
<port>  
Adds a static entry to the forwarding database.  
del <MAC address> <VLAN>  
Deletes a static entry from the forwarding database.  
clear mac <MAC  
Address>|VLAN <1-4095>|  
Port <port number>|All  
Clears specified static FDB entries from the forwarding database, as  
follows:  
•
•
•
•
MAC address  
VLAN  
Port  
All  
cur  
Displays current static FDB parameters.  
Configuration Menu 148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trunk configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/trunk <1-12>  
[Trunk group 1 Menu]  
add  
rem  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Add port to trunk group  
- Remove port from trunk group  
- Enable trunk group  
- Disable trunk group  
- Delete trunk group  
- Display current Trunk Group configuration  
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between switches or other trunk capable  
devices. A trunk is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth to create a single,  
larger port.  
Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the switch, with the following restrictions.  
•
•
•
Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.  
Up to six ports can belong to the same trunk group.  
All ports in a trunk must have the same configuration for speed, flow control, and auto  
negotiation.  
•
Trunking from other devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology.  
NOTE: See the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application Guide for information on how to use port  
trunks.  
The following table describes the Trunk Group Configuration Menu options.  
Table 117 Trunk Group Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <port number>  
Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.  
Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.  
Enables the current trunk group.  
rem <port number>  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Turns the current trunk group off.  
Removes the current trunk group configuration.  
Displays current trunk group parameters.  
Configuration Menu 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Trunk Hash configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/thash  
[IP Trunk Hash Menu]  
set  
cur  
- IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu  
- Display current IP trunk hash configuration  
The following table describes the IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu options.  
Table 118 IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
set  
Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu.  
Display current trunk hash configuration.  
cur  
Layer 2 IP Trunk Hash configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/thash/set  
[set IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu]  
smac  
dmac  
sip  
- Enable/disable smac hash  
- Enable/disable dmac hash  
- Enable/disable sip hash  
dip  
- Enable/disable dip hash  
cur  
- Display current trunk hash setting  
Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the HP 10GbE switch. You can enable one or two  
parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
SMAC (source MAC only)  
DMAC (destination MAC only)  
SIP (source IP only)  
DIP (destination IP only)  
SIP + DIP (source IP and destination IP)  
SMAC + DMAC (source MAC and destination MAC)  
The following table describes the IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu options.  
Table 119 IP Trunk Hash Set Menu options  
Command  
Description  
smac enable|disable  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC.  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC.  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP.  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP.  
Display current trunk hash configuration.  
dmac enable|disable  
sip enable|disable  
dip enable|disable  
cur  
Configuration Menu 150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Link Aggregation Control Protocol configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/lacp  
[LACP Menu]  
sysprio - Set LACP system priority  
timeout - Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info  
port - LACP port Menu  
cur - Display current LACP configuration  
The following table describes the LACP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 120 LACP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
sysprio<1-65535>  
Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the switch. Lower numbers  
provide higher priority. The default value is 32768.  
timeout short|long  
Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote  
partner. Choose short(3 seconds) or long(90 seconds). The default  
value is long.  
HP recommends that you use a timeout value of long, to reduce LACPDU  
processing. If your switch’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods  
of 90 seconds or more, consider using static trunks instead of LACP.  
port<port number>  
Displays the LACP Port menu.  
cur  
Display current LACP configuration.  
LACP Port configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number>  
[LACP Port 2 Menu]  
mode  
prio  
- Set LACP mode  
- Set LACP port priority  
adminkey - Set LACP port admin key  
cur  
- Display current LACP port configuration  
The following table describes the LACP Port Configuration Menu options.  
Table 121 LACP Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
mode off|active|passive  
Set the LACP mode for this port, as follows:  
• off—Turn LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually  
configure a static trunk. The default value is off.  
• active—Turn LACP on and set this port to active. Active ports initiate  
LACPDUs.  
• passive—Turn LACP on and set this port to passive. Passive ports do  
not initiate LACPDUs, but respond to LACPDUs from active ports.  
prio<1-65535>  
Sets the priority value for the selected port. Lower numbers provide higher  
priority. The default is 128.  
Configuration Menu 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 121 LACP Port Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
adminkey<1-65535>  
Set the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and  
oper key (operational state generated internally) can form a LACP trunk  
group.  
cur  
Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.  
VLAN configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/vlan <1-4094>  
[VLAN 1 Menu]  
name  
stg  
add  
rem  
def  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Set VLAN name  
- Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group  
- Add port to VLAN  
- Remove port from VLAN  
- Define VLAN as list of ports  
- Enable VLAN  
- Disable VLAN  
- Delete VLAN  
- Display current VLAN configuration  
The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes, change the status of the VLAN, delete the  
VLAN, and change the port membership of the VLAN.  
By default, the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1, which is always enabled. The HP  
10GbE switch supports a maximum of 1,000 VLANs. VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch  
management.  
NOTE: See the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application Guide for information on VLANs.  
The following table describes the VLAN Configuration Menu options.  
Table 122 VLAN Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
name <1-32 characters>  
Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default  
VLAN name is the first one.  
stg <1-127>  
Assigns a VLAN to a spanning tree group. If MSTP is used, the range  
is 0-32 (0 = CIST).  
add <port number>  
Adds ports to the VLAN membership.  
rem <port number>  
Removes ports from the VLAN membership.  
def <list of port numbers>  
Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. Every port must be a  
member of at least one VLAN. By default, it defines ports to VLAN 1.  
ena  
dis  
Enables this VLAN.  
Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.  
Configuration Menu 152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 122 VLAN Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
del  
Deletes this VLAN.  
cur  
Displays the current VLAN configuration.  
IMPORTANT: All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN  
and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. You  
cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. Also, you  
cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on. See the  
tagcommand, in the “Port configuration” section earlier in this chapter.  
Protocol VLAN configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/vlan x/pvlan x  
[VLAN 1 Protocol 1 Menu]  
pty  
- Set protocol type  
protocol - Select a predefined protocol  
prio  
add  
- Set priority to protocol  
- Add port to PVLAN  
rem  
- Remove port from PVLAN  
ports  
- Add/Remove a list of ports to/from PVLAN  
tagpvl - Enable/Disable port tagging for PVLAN  
taglist - Enable tagging a port list for PVLAN  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable protocol  
- Disable protocol  
- Delete protocol  
- Display current PVLAN configuration  
The following table describes the Protocol VLAN Configuration Menu options.  
Table 123 Protocol VLAN Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol.  
Ethernet type consists of a 4-digit (16 bit) hex code, such as 0080 (IPv4).  
pty <(Ether2|SNAP|LLC)>  
<Ethernet type>  
protocol  
Selects a pre-defined protocol, as follows:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
decEther2  
ipv4Ether2  
ipv6Ether2  
ipx802.2  
ipx802.3  
ipxEther2  
ipxSnap  
netbios  
rarpEther2  
sna802.2  
snaEther2  
vinesEther2  
xnsEther2  
Configuration Menu 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 123 Protocol VLAN Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prio <0-7>  
Configures the priority value for this PVLAN.  
Adds a port to the selected PVLAN.  
Removes a port from the selected PVLAN.  
add  
rem  
ports  
Defines a list of ports that belong to the selected protocol on this VLAN.  
Enter 0 (zero) to remove all ports.  
tagpvl enable|disable  
taglist  
Enables or disables port tagging on this PVLAN.  
Defines a list of ports that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this  
VLAN. Enter empty to disable tagging on all ports by this PVLAN.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables the selected protocol on the VLAN.  
Disables the selected protocol on the VLAN.  
Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN.  
Displays the current configuration for this Protocol VLAN.  
Private VLAN configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/vlan x/privlan  
[privlan Menu]  
type  
map  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Set Private-VLAN type  
- Associate secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN  
- Enable Private-VLAN  
- Disable Private-VLAN  
- Display current Private-VLAN configuration  
The following table describes the Private VLAN Configuration Menu options.  
Table 124 Private VLAN Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
type primary|isolated|community  
Defines the VLAN type, as follows:  
•
Primary: A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN.  
The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic to ports on the  
isolated VLAN or to community VLAN.  
•
•
Isolated: The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from  
host ports. A Private VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN.  
Community: Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from  
host ports. A Private VLAN may have multiple community  
VLANs.  
map <2-4094>  
Configures Private VLAN mapping between a secondary VLAN  
(isolated or community) and a primary VLAN. Enter the  
primary VLAN ID.  
ena  
Enables the Private VLAN.  
Configuration Menu 154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 124 Private VLAN Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
dis  
Disables the Private VLAN.  
cur  
Displays current parameters for the Private VLAN.  
Hot Links configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/hotlink  
[Hot Links Menu]  
trigger - Trigger Menu  
bpdu - Enable/disable BPDU flood  
sndfdb - Enable/disable FDB update  
on  
- Globally turn Hot Links ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn Hot Links OFF  
- Display current Hot Links configuration  
The following table describes the Hot Links Configuration menu options.  
Table 125 Hot Links Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
trigger <1-4>  
Displays the Hot Links Trigger menu.  
bpdu enable|disable  
Enables or disables the ability to flood BPDUs on the active Hot Links  
interface the interface belongs to a Spanning Tree group that is globally  
turned off.  
The default value is disabled.  
sndfdb enable|disable  
Enables or disables FDB Update, which allows the GbE2c to send FDB and  
MAC update packets over the active interface.  
The default value is disabled.  
on  
Globally turns Hot Links on. The default value is off.  
Globally turns Hot Links off.  
off  
cur  
Displays the current Hot Links configuration.  
Configuration Menu 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hot Links Trigger configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-4>  
[Trigger 1 Menu]  
master - Master Menu  
backup - Backup Menu  
fdelay - Set Forward Delay (secs)  
name  
- Set Trigger Name  
preempt - Enable/disable Preemption  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable Trigger  
- Disable Trigger  
- Delete Trigger  
- Display current Trigger configuration  
The following table describes the Hot Links Trigger Menu options.  
Table 126 Hot Links Trigger menu options  
Command  
Description  
master  
Displays the Master interface menu for the selected trigger.  
Displays the Backup interface menu for the selected trigger.  
Configures the Forward Delay interval, in seconds. The default value is 1.  
Configures a name for the trigger.  
backup  
fdelay <0-3600>  
name <text string>  
preempt enable|disable  
Enables or disables pre-emption, which allows the Master interface to  
transition to the Active state whenever it becomes available.  
The default option is enabled.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables the Hot Links trigger.  
Disables the Hot Links trigger.  
Deletes the Hot Links trigger.  
Displays the current Hot Links trigger configuration.  
Hot Links Master configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-4>/master  
[Master Menu]  
port  
trunk  
cur  
- Set port in Master  
- Set trunk in Master  
- Display current Master configuration  
The following table describes the Hot Links Master menu options.  
Table 127 Hot Links Master Menu options  
Command  
Description  
Adds the selected port to the Master interface.  
Enter zero (0) to clear the port.  
port <port number (0, 18-21)>  
trunk <trunk group number (1-12)>  
Adds the selected trunk group to the Master interface.  
Configuration Menu 156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 127 Hot Links Master Menu options  
Command  
Description  
cur  
Displays the current Master interface configuration.  
Hot Links Backup configuration  
Command: /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-4>/backup  
[Backup Menu]  
port  
trunk  
cur  
- Set port in Backup  
- Set trunk in Backup  
- Display current Backup configuration  
The following table describes the Hot Links Backup Menu options.  
Table 128 Hot Links Backup menu options  
Command  
Description  
Adds the selected port to the Backup interface.  
Enter zero (0) to clear the port.  
port <port number (0, 18-21)>  
trunk <trunk group number (1-12)>  
Adds the selected trunk group to the Backup interface.  
Displays the current Backup interface configuration.  
cur  
Configuration Menu 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Layer 3 configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3  
[Layer 3 Menu]  
if  
- Interface Menu  
gw  
route  
arp  
- Default Gateway Menu  
- Static Route Menu  
- ARP Menu  
frwd  
nwf  
rmap  
rip  
ospf  
igmp  
dns  
bootp  
sm  
- Forwarding Menu  
- Network Filters Menu  
- Route Map Menu  
- Routing Information Protocol Menu  
- Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu  
- IGMP Menu  
- Domain Name System Menu  
- Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu  
- ServerMobility Menu  
vrrp  
rtrid  
cur  
- Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu  
- Set router ID  
- Display current IP configuration  
The following table describes the Layer 3 Configuration Menu options.  
Table 129 L3 Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
if <1-250>  
Displays the IP Interface Menu.  
gw <1-4, 254>  
route  
Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu.  
Displays the IP Static Route Menu.  
Displays the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Menu.  
Displays the IP Forwarding Menu.  
Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu.  
Displays the Route Map Menu.  
arp  
frwd  
nwf <1-256>  
rmap <1-32>  
rip  
Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu.  
Displays the OSPF Menu.  
ospf  
igmp  
Displays the IGMP Menu.  
dns  
Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu.  
Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu.  
Displays the Server Mobility Menu.  
Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu.  
Sets the router ID.  
bootp  
sm  
vrrp  
rtrid <IP address (such  
as, 192.4.17.101)>  
cur  
Displays the current IP configuration.  
Configuration Menu 158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP interface configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/if <1-250>  
[IP Interface 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
vlan  
relay  
ena  
- Set IP address  
- Set subnet mask  
- Set VLAN number  
- Enable/disable BOOTP relay  
- Enable IP interface  
dis  
del  
- Disable IP interface  
- Delete IP interface  
cur  
- Display current interface configuration  
The switch can be configured with up to 250 IP interfaces. Each IP interface represents the switch on  
an IP subnet on your network. The IP Interface option is disabled by default.  
The following table describes the IP Interface Configuration Menu options.  
Table 130 IP Interface Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addr <IP address>  
Configures the IP address of the switch interface, using dotted decimal  
notation. For example, 192.2.14.101  
mask <IP subnet mask>  
vlan <1-4094>  
Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted  
decimal notation. For example, 255.255.255.0  
Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong  
to one VLAN, though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.  
relay disable|enable  
Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. The default value is  
enabled.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables this IP interface.  
Disables this IP interface.  
Removes this IP interface.  
Displays the current interface settings.  
NOTE: If you enter an IP address for interface 1, you are prompted to change the BOOTP setting.  
Configuration Menu 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Gateway configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/gw <1-4, 254>  
[Default gateway 1 Menu]  
addr  
intr  
- Set IP address  
- Set interval between ping attempts  
retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN  
arp  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable/disable ARP only health checks  
- Enable default gateway  
- Disable default gateway  
- Delete default gateway  
- Display current default gateway configuration  
The switch supports up to four gateways, plus the management gateway 254. By default,  
no gateways are configured on the switch. Enter 1, 2, 3,or 4, or 254in the command as the  
<gateway number>, depending upon which gateway you want to configure.  
The following table describes the Default IP Gateway Configuration Menu options.  
Table 131 Default IP Gateway Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addr <IP address>  
Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.  
For example, 192.4.17.44.  
intr <0-60>  
The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it is up. The introption sets  
the time between health checks. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds. The default is  
2 seconds.  
retry <1-120>  
arp disable|enable  
Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this  
default gateway inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The default is 8  
attempts.  
Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. This  
command is disabled by default.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables the gateway for use.  
Disables the gateway.  
Deletes the gateway from the configuration.  
Displays the current gateway settings.  
Configuration Menu 160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Static Route configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/route  
[IP Static Route Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add static route  
- Remove static route  
- Display current static route configuration  
The following table describes the Static Route Configuration Menu options.  
Table 132 Static Route Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <IP address> <IP subnet  
mask> <gateway> <interface>  
Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination  
IP address, destination subnet mask, and gateway address.  
Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.  
rem <IP address> <IP subnet  
mask>  
Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to  
remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.  
cur  
Displays the current IP configuration.  
Address Resolution Protocol configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/arp  
[ARP Menu]  
static - Static ARP Menu  
rearp  
cur  
- Set re-ARP period in minutes  
- Display current ARP configuration  
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. ARP  
resolves a physical address from an IP address. ARP queries machines on the local network for their  
physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. In any IP  
communication, the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is  
present in the ARP cache. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.  
The following table describes the ARP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 133 ARP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
static  
Displays the Static ARP Configuration menu.  
Defines re-ARP period in minutes. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.  
Displays the current ARP configurations.  
rearp <2-120>  
cur  
Configuration Menu 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Static ARP configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/arp/static  
[Static ARP Menu]  
add  
- Add a permanent ARP entry  
del  
- Delete an ARP entry  
clear  
cur  
- Clear static ARP entries  
- Display current static ARP configuration  
Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that  
are learnt dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending  
an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with  
devices that do not respond to ARP requests. Static ARPs can also be configured on some  
gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks.  
The following table describes the Static ARP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 134 Static ARP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <IP address> <MAC address>  
<VLAN number> <port number>  
Adds a permanent ARP entry.  
del <IP address (such as,  
Deletes a permanent ARP entry.  
Clears static ARP entries.  
192.4.17.101)>  
clear [<interface number>|<VLAN  
number>|<port number>|all] <ARP  
entry number>  
cur  
Displays current static ARP configuration.  
IP Forwarding configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/frwd  
[IP Forwarding Menu]  
dirbr  
on  
- Enable/disable forwarding directed broadcasts  
- Globally turn IP Forwarding ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF  
- Display current IP Forwarding configuration  
The following table describes the IP Forwarding Configuration Menu options.  
Table 135 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
dirbr disable|enable  
Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. This command is  
disabled by default.  
on  
Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the switch.  
off  
Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the switch. Forwarding is turned off by  
default.  
cur  
Displays the current IP forwarding settings.  
Configuration Menu 162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Network Filter configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/nwf <1-256>  
[IP Network Filter 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
- IP Address  
- IP Subnet mask  
enable - Enable Network Filter  
disable - Disable Network Filter  
delete - Delete Network Filter  
current - Display current Network Filter configuration  
The following table describes the Network Filter Configuration Menu options.  
Table 136 Network Filter Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addr <IP address>  
Sets the starting IP address for this filter. The default address is 0.0.0.0.  
mask <IP subnet mask>  
Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addrto define the  
range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is  
enabled. The default value is 0.0.0.0.  
enable  
disable  
delete  
current  
Enables the Network Filter configuration.  
Disables the Network Filter configuration.  
Deletes the Network Filter configuration.  
Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.  
Route Map configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/rmap <1-32>  
[IP Route Map 1 Menu]  
alist  
- Access List number  
metric - Set metric of the matched route  
type  
prec  
- Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route  
- Set the precedence of this route map  
enable - Enable route map  
disable - Disable route map  
delete - Delete route map  
current - Display current route map configuration  
Routing maps control and modify routing information. The map number <1-32>represents the  
routing map you wish to configure.  
The following table describes the Route Map Configuration Menu options.  
Table 137 Route Map Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
alist <1-8>  
Displays the Access List menu.  
Sets the metric of the matched route.  
metric <0-16777214>|none  
Configuration Menu 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 137 Route Map Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
type 1|2|none  
Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1.  
• 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external  
metrics.  
• 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics.  
Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2.  
• none—Removes the OSPF metric.  
prec <1-255>  
Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher  
the precedence. Default value is 10.  
enable  
disable  
delete  
cur  
Enables the route map.  
Disables the route map.  
Deletes the route map.  
Displays the current route configuration.  
IP Access List configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/rmap <1-32>/alist <1-8>  
[IP Access List 1 Menu]  
nwf  
- Network Filter number  
metric - Metric  
action - Set Network Filter action  
enable - Enable Access List  
disable - Disable Access List  
delete - Delete Access List  
current - Display current Access List configuration  
The route map number <1-32>and the access list number <1-8>represent the IP access list you  
wish to configure. The following table describes the IP Access List Configuration Menu options.  
Table 138 IP Access List Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
nwf <1-256>  
Sets the network filter number.  
Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.  
Permits or denies action for the access list.  
Enables the access list.  
metric <1-16777214>|none  
action permit|deny  
enable  
disable  
Disables the access list.  
delete  
Deletes the access list.  
cur  
Displays the current Access List configuration.  
Configuration Menu 164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Routing Information Protocol configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/rip  
[Routing Information Protocol Menu]  
if  
- RIP Interface Menu  
update - Set update period in seconds  
redist - RIP Route Redistribute Menu  
on  
off  
- Globally turn RIP ON  
- Globally turn RIP OFF  
current - Display current RIP configuration  
The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters. This option is turned off  
by default.  
The following table describes the RIP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 139 RIP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
if <1-249>  
Displays the RIP Interface menu.  
update <1-120>  
Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates, in seconds.  
The default value is 30 seconds.  
redist  
on  
Displays the RIP Route Redistribute menu.  
Globally turns RIP on.  
off  
Globally turns RIP off.  
cur  
Displays the current RIP configuration.  
Configuration Menu 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RIP Interface configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/rip/if <1-249>  
[RIP Interface 1 Menu]  
version - Set RIP version  
supply - Enable/disable supplying route updates  
listen - Enable/disable listening to route updates  
poison - Enable/disable poisoned reverse  
split  
trigg  
mcast  
- Enable/disable split horizon  
- Enable/disable triggered updates  
- Enable/disable multicast updates  
default - Set default route action  
metric - Set metric  
auth  
key  
- Set authentication type  
- Set authentication key  
enable - Enable interface  
disable - Disable interface  
current - Display current RIP interface configuration  
The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters. This option is turned off  
by default.  
NOTE: Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.  
The following table describes the RIP Interface Configuration Menu options.  
Table 140 RIP Interface Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
version 1|2|both  
Configures the RIP version used by this interface.  
The default value is version 2.  
supply disable|enable  
listen disable|enable  
poison disable|enable  
When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. This command is  
enabled by default.  
When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers. This command  
is enabled by default.  
When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When  
disabled, the switch uses only split horizon. The default value is disabled.  
split disable|enable  
trigg disable|enable  
Enables or disables split horizon. The default value is enabled.  
Enables or disables Triggered Updates. Triggered Updates are used to  
speed convergence. When enabled, Triggered Updates force a router to  
send update messages immediately, even if it is not yet time for the update  
message. The default value is enabled.  
mcast disable|enable  
Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address  
224.0.0.9). The default value is enabled.  
default  
none|listen|supply|both  
When enabled, the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers, but  
gives them lower priority than configured default gateways. When  
disabled, the switch rejects RIP default routes. The default value is  
disabled.  
metric <1-15>  
Configures the route metric, which indicates the relative distance to the  
destination. The default value is 1.  
auth none|password  
Configures the authentication type. The default is none.  
Configuration Menu 166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 140 RIP Interface Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
key  
Configures the authentication key password.  
Enables this RIP interface.  
enable  
disable  
cur  
Disables this RIP interface.  
Displays the current RIP configuration.  
RIP Route Redistribution configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/rip/redist fixed|static|ospf|eospf  
[RIP Redistribute Fixed Menu]  
add  
rem  
- Add rmap into route redistribution list  
- Remove rmap from route redistribution list  
export - Export all routes of this protocol  
cur - Display current route-maps added  
The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribute Menu options.  
Table 141 RIP Redistribute Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <1-32> <1-32>|all  
Adds selected routing maps to the RIP route redistribution list. To add all  
the 32 route maps, enter all. To add specific route maps, enter routing  
map numbers one per line, NULL at the end.  
This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The routes of  
the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route  
redistribution list will be redistributed.  
remove <1-32> <1-32>|all  
Removes the route map from the RIP route redistribution list.  
Removes routing maps from the list. To remove all 32 route maps, enter  
all. To remove specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per  
line, NULL at end.  
export <1-15>|none  
Exports the routes of this protocol in which the metric and metric type are  
specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the  
routes of the protocol, enter none.  
cur  
Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration.  
Configuration Menu 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open Shortest Path First configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf  
[Open Shortest Path First Menu]  
aindex - OSPF Area (index) Menu  
range  
if  
- OSPF Summary Range Menu  
- OSPF Interface Menu  
virt  
- OSPF Virtual Links Menu  
md5key - OSPF MD5 Key Menu  
host - OSPF Host Entry Menu  
redist - OSPF Route Redistribute Menu  
lsdb - Set the LSDB limit for external LSA  
default - Export default route information  
on  
- Globally turn OSPF ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn OSPF OFF  
- Display current OSPF configuration  
The following table describes the Open Shortest Path First Menu options.  
Table 142 OSPF Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
aindex <0-2>  
Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent  
the actual OSPF area number.  
range <1-16>  
if <1-249>  
virt <1-3>  
Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses.  
Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu.  
Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual  
Link.  
md5key <1-255 characters>  
host <1-128>  
Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key.  
Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to  
128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for  
advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to per-  
form server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border  
Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible.  
redist <fixed|static|rip>  
lsdb <0-2000>  
Displays Route Distribution Menu.  
Sets the link state database limit. Enter 0(zero) for no limit.  
default <1-16777214>|none  
Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area.  
Enter nonefor no default route.  
on  
Enables OSPF.  
off  
cur  
Disables OSPF.  
Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.  
Configuration Menu 168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OSFP Area Index configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <0-2>  
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu]  
areaid - Set area ID  
type  
- Set area type  
metric - Set stub area metric  
auth  
spf  
- Set authentication type  
- Set time interval between two SPF calculations  
enable - Enable area  
disable - Disable area  
delete - Delete area  
cur  
- Display current OSPF area configuration  
The following table describes the Area Index Configuration Menu options.  
Table 143 OSPF Area Index Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
areaid <IP address>  
Defines the area ID of the OSPF area number.  
type transit|stub|nssa  
Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be  
established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit.  
• transit—allows area summary information to be exchanged between  
routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered  
to be transit area.  
• stub—an area where external routing information is not distributed.  
Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area.  
• nssa—Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional  
capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can  
be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. External routes  
from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the  
NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.  
metric <1-65535>  
Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received  
via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing  
routing decisions.  
Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route.  
Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for  
external routes.  
auth none|password|md5  
Defines the authentication method, as follows:  
• none—No authentication required.  
• password—Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing  
devices can participate.  
• md5—This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is  
required.  
spf <0-255>  
Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations  
of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.  
enable  
disable  
delete  
cur  
Enables the OSPF area.  
Disables the OSPF area.  
Deletes the OSPF area.  
Displays the current OSPF configuration.  
Configuration Menu 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Summary Range configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/range <1-16>  
[OSPF Summary Range 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
- Set IP address  
- Set IP mask  
aindex - Set area index  
hide  
- Enable/disable hide range  
enable - Enable range  
disable - Disable range  
delete - Delete range  
cur  
- Display current OSPF summary range configuration  
The following table describes the OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu options.  
Table 144 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addr <IP Address>  
Configures the base IP address for the range. For example, 100.10.1.1.  
Configures the IP address mask for the range.  
Configures the area index used by the switch.  
Hides the OSPF summary range.  
mask <IP address mask>  
aindex <0-2>  
hide disable|enable  
enable  
Enables the OSPF summary range.  
disable  
Disables the OSPF summary range.  
delete  
Deletes the OSPF summary range.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF summary range.  
OSPF Interface configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/if <1-249>  
[OSPF Interface 1 Menu]  
aindex - Set area index  
prio  
cost  
hello  
dead  
trans  
retra  
key  
- Set interface router priority  
- Set interface cost  
- Set hello interval in seconds  
- Set dead interval in seconds  
- Set transit delay in seconds  
- Set retransmit interval in seconds  
- Set authentication key  
mdkey  
- Set MD5 key ID  
enable - Enable interface  
disable - Disable interface  
delete - Delete interface  
cur  
- Display current OSPF interface configuration  
Configuration Menu 170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the OSPF Interface Configuration Menu options.  
Table 145 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
aindex <0-2>  
Configures the OSPF area index.  
prio <0-255>  
Configures the assigned priority value to the OSPF interfaces.  
(A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0  
specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup  
Designated Router (BDR).)  
cost <1-65535>  
Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the cost  
is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates  
high bandwidth.  
hello <1-65535>  
dead <1-65535>  
Configures the interval in seconds between the hellopackets for the interfaces.  
Configures the health parameters of a hellopacket, which is set for an interval  
of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down.  
trans <1-3600>  
retra <1-3600>  
key <key string>|none  
mdkey <1-255>|none  
enable  
Configures the transit delay in seconds.  
Configures the retransmit interval in seconds.  
Sets the authentication key to clear the password.  
Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.  
Enables the OSPF interface.  
disable  
Disables the OSPF interface.  
delete  
Deletes the OSPF interface.  
cur  
Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.  
Configuration Menu 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Virtual Link configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/virt <1-3>  
[OSPF Virtual Link 1 Menu]  
aindex - Set area index  
hello  
dead  
trans  
retra  
nbr  
- Set hello interval in seconds  
- Set dead interval in seconds  
- Set transit delay in seconds  
- Set retransmit interval in seconds  
- Set router ID of virtual neighbor  
- Set authentication key  
key  
mdkey  
- Set MD5 key ID  
enable - Enable interface  
disable - Disable interface  
delete - Delete interface  
cur  
- Display current OSPF interface configuration  
The following table describes the OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu options.  
Table 146 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
aindex <0-2>  
Configures the OSPF area index.  
hello <1-65535>  
Configures the authentication parameters of a hellopacket, which is set to be in  
an interval of seconds.  
dead <1-65535>  
Configures the health parameters of a hellopacket, which is set to be in an  
interval of seconds. Default is 40 seconds.  
trans <1-3600>  
retra <1-3600>  
nbr <IP address>  
key <password>  
Configures the delay in transit in seconds. Default is one second.  
Configures the retransmit interval in seconds. Default is five seconds.  
Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. Default is 0.0.0.0.  
Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is  
none.  
mdkey <1-255>|none  
enable  
Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none.  
Enables OSPF virtual link.  
disable  
Disables OSPF virtual link.  
delete  
Deletes OSPF virtual link.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.  
Configuration Menu 172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Host Entry configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/host <1-128>  
[OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu]  
addr  
- Set host entry IP address  
aindex - Set area index  
cost  
- Set cost of this host entry  
enable - Enable host entry  
disable - Disable host entry  
delete - Delete host entry  
cur  
- Display current OSPF host entry configuration  
The following table describes the OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu options.  
Table 147 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addr <IP address>  
Configures the base IP address for the host entry. For example, 100.10.1.1.  
Configures the area index of the host.  
Configures the cost value of the host.  
Enables OSPF host entry.  
aindex <0-2>  
cost <1-65535>  
enable  
disable  
Disables OSPF host entry.  
delete  
Deletes OSPF host entry.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF host entries.  
OSPF Route Redistribution configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/redist fixed|static|rip  
[OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu]  
add  
rem  
- Add rmap into route redistribution list  
- Remove rmap from route redistribution list  
export - Export all routes of this protocol  
cur - Display current route-maps added  
The following table describes the OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu options.  
Table 148 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <1-32> <1-32>|all  
Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. To add all the 32 route  
maps, enter all. To add specific route maps, enter routing map  
numbers one per line, NULL at the end.  
This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The  
routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the  
route redistribution list will be redistributed.  
rem <1-32> <1-32> ... |all  
Removes the route map from the route redistribution list.  
Removes routing maps from the rmaplist. To remove all 32 route  
maps, enter all. To remove specific route maps, enter routing map  
numbers one per line, NULL at the end.  
Configuration Menu 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 148 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu options  
Command Description  
export <1-16777215> 1|2|none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs  
in which the metric and metric type are specified. To remove a  
previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol,  
enter none.  
cur  
Displays the current route map settings.  
OSPF MD5 Key configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key <key ID>  
[OSPF MD5 Key 1 Menu]  
key  
- Set authentication key  
delete - Delete key  
cur  
- Display current MD5 key configuration  
The following table describes the OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu options.  
Table 149 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
key <1-16 characters>  
Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet.  
Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.  
Displays the current MD5 key configuration.  
delete  
cur  
Configuration Menu 174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGMP configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp  
[IGMP Menu]  
snoop  
- IGMP Snoop Menu  
mrouter - Static Multicast Router Menu  
igmpflt - IGMP Filtering Menu  
on  
- Globally turn IGMP ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn IGMP OFF  
- Display current IGMP configuration  
IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it. IGMP  
Snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. The switch learns which server  
hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic, and forwards it only to ports connected to those  
servers.  
The following table describes the IGMP Menu options.  
Table 150 IGMP Snoop Menu options  
Command  
Description  
snoop  
Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu.  
Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu.  
Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu.  
Globally turns IGMP on.  
mrouter  
igmpflt  
on  
off  
Globally turns IGMP off.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters.  
IGMP snooping configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop  
[IGMP Snoop Menu]  
igmpv3 - IGMP Version3 Snoop Menu  
timeout - Set report timeout  
mrto  
- Set multicast router timeout  
qintrval - Set IGMP query interval  
robust - Set expected packet loss on subnet  
flood  
aggr  
srcip  
add  
rem  
clear  
- Flood unregistered IPMC  
- Aggregate IGMP report  
- Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ  
- Add VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping  
- Remove VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping  
- Remove all VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping  
fastlv - Enable/disable Fastleave processing in VLAN  
cur - Display current IGMP Snooping configuration  
Configuration Menu 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the IGMP Snoop Configuration Menu options.  
Table 151 IGMP Snoop Menu options  
Command  
Description  
igmpv3  
Displays the IGMPv3 Snooping menu.  
timeout <1-255>  
mrto <1-600>  
Sets the Maximum Response Time (MRT) for IGMP hosts. MRT is one of the  
parameters used to determine the age out period of the IGMP hosts.  
Increasing the timeout increases the age out period.  
The range is from 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.  
Configures the age-out period for the IGMP Mrouters in the Mrouter table. If  
the switch does not receive a General Query from the Mrouter for mrto  
seconds, the switch removes the multicast router from its Mrouter table.  
The range is from 1 to 600 seconds. The default is 255 seconds.  
qintrval <1-600>  
robust <2-10>  
Sets the IGMP router query interval. The range is 1-600 seconds. The default  
value is 125.  
Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the switch  
for expected packet loss on the subnet. If the subnet is expected to be lossy  
(high rate of packet loss), then increase the value. The default value is 2.  
flood disable|enable  
Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast reports to all  
ports.  
aggr disable|enable  
Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation.  
srcip <IP address>  
Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific  
Queries.  
add <1-4094>  
rem <1-4094>  
clear  
Adds the VLAN to IGMP Snooping.  
Removes the VLAN from IGMP Snooping.  
Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping.  
fastlv <1-4094>  
disable|enable  
Enables or disables FastLeave processing. FastLeave allows the switch to  
immediately remove a port from the IGMP port list, if the host sends a Leave  
message, and the proper conditions are met. This command is disabled by  
default.  
ena  
dis  
cur  
Enables IGMP Snooping.  
Disables IGMP Snooping.  
Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters.  
Configuration Menu 176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGMPv3 Snooping configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3  
[IGMP V3 Snoop Menu]  
sources - Set the number of sources to snoop in group record  
v1v2 - Enable/disable snooping IGMPv1/v2 reports  
exclude - Enable/disable snooping EXCLUDE mode reports  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Enable IGMPv3 Snooping  
- Disable IGMPv3 Snooping  
- Display current IGMP Snooping V3 configuration  
The following table describes the IGMPv3 Snooping Configuration Menu options.  
Table 152 IGMPv3 Snooping Menu options  
Command  
Description  
sources <1-64>  
Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to  
snoop from within the group record. Use this command to limit the  
number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control.  
v1v2 enable|disable  
Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2  
reports. When disabled, the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2  
reports. The default value is enabled.  
exclude enable|disable  
Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports. When  
disabled, the switch ignores Exclude Reports. The default value is  
enabled.  
ena  
dis  
cur  
Enables IGMP version 3. The default value is disabled.  
Disables IGMP version 3.  
Displays the current IGMP version 3 parameters.  
Configuration Menu 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGMP static multicast router configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter  
[Static Multicast Router Menu]  
add - Add port as Multicast Router Port  
rem - Remove port as Multicast Router Port  
cur - Display current Multicast Router configuration  
The following table describes the Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu options.  
NOTE: When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN, the process of learning multicast  
routers is disabled for that VLAN.  
Table 153 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu  
Command  
Description  
add <port number> <1-4094> <1-3>  
Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static  
multicast router is connected, and configures the IGMP  
version (1, 2, or 3) of the multicast router.  
remove <port number> <1-4094>  
Removes a static multicast router from the selected  
port/VLAN combination.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router  
parameters.  
IGMP filtering configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt  
[IGMP Filter Menu]  
filter - IGMP Filter Definition Menu  
port - IGMP Filtering Port Menu  
ena - Enable IGMP Filtering  
dis - Disable IGMP Filtering  
cur - Display current IGMP Filtering configuration  
The following table describes the IGMP Filter Configuration Menu options.  
Table 154 IGMP Filtering Menu options  
Command  
Description  
filter <1-16>  
Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu.  
Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu.  
Enables IGMP filtering globally.  
Disables IGMP Filtering globally.  
Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters.  
port <port number>  
ena  
dis  
cur  
Configuration Menu 178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGMP filter definition  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter <1-16>  
[IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu]  
range - Set IP Multicast address range  
action - Set filter action  
ena - Enable filter  
dis - Disable filter  
del - Delete filter  
cur - Display current IGMP filter configuration  
The following table describes the IGMP Filter Definition Menu options.  
Table 155 IGMP Filter Definition Menu options  
Command  
Description  
range <IP multicast address>  
<IP multicast address>  
Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter. Enter the  
first IP multicast address of the ranger, followed by the second IP  
multicast address of the range.  
action allow|deny  
Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses  
specified.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables this IGMP filter.  
Disables this IGMP filter.  
Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions.  
Displays the current IGMP filter.  
IGMP filtering port configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port <port number>  
[IGMP Port 20 Menu]  
filt - Enable/disable IGMP Filtering on port  
add - Add IGMP filter to port  
rem - Remove IGMP filter from port  
cur - Display current IGMP Filtering Port configuration  
The following table describes the IGMP Port Filtering Configuration Menu options.  
Table 156 IGMP Filtering Port Menu options  
Command  
Description  
filt enable|disable  
Enables or disables IGMP Filtering on this port.  
Adds an IGMP filter to this port.  
add <1-16>  
rem <1-16>  
cur  
Removes an IGMP filter from this port.  
Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port.  
Configuration Menu 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Domain Name System configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/dns  
[Domain Name System Menu]  
prima - Set IP address of primary DNS server  
secon - Set IP address of secondary DNS server  
dname - Set default domain name  
cur  
- Display current DNS configuration  
The Domain Name System (DNS) Configuration Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary  
DNS servers on your local network, and for setting the default domain name served by the switch  
services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping,  
traceroute,and tftpcommands.  
The following table describes the Domain Name System (DNS) Configuration Menu options.  
Table 157 Domain Name System (DNS) Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prima <IP address>  
Sets the IP address for your primary DNS server. Use dotted  
decimal notation. For example, 192.4.17.41.  
secon <IP address>  
Sets the IP address for your secondary DNS server. If the  
primary DNS server fails, the configured secondary will be used  
instead. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. For  
example, 192.4.17.42.  
dname <dotted DNS notation>|none  
Sets the default domain name used by the switch. For example:  
mycompany.com.  
cur  
Displays the current Domain Name System (DNS) settings.  
Bootstrap Protocol Relay configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/bootp  
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu]  
addr  
addr2  
on  
- Set IP address of BOOTP server  
- Set IP address of second BOOTP server  
- Globally turn BOOTP relay ON  
off  
- Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF  
cur  
- Display current BOOTP relay configuration  
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from  
a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch  
to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have  
been configured on the switch.  
BOOTP relay is turned off by default.  
Configuration Menu 180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the BOOTP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 158 BOOTP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addr <IP address>  
Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. For example, 100.10.1.1.  
addr2 <IP address>  
Sets the IP address of the secondary BOOTP server. For example,  
100.10.1.2.  
on  
Globally turns on BOOTP relay.  
off  
cur  
Globally turns on BOOTP relay.  
Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.  
Server Mobility configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/sm  
[ServerMobility Menu]  
port  
- Server Mobility Port Menu  
default - Set ServerMobility configuration to factory default  
add  
rem  
- Add ServerMobility ports  
- Remove ServerMobility ports  
filter - Enable/Disable DHCP request message filters on ports  
nsmrelay - Enable/Disable relay on non-ServerMobility ports  
on  
- Globally turn ServerMobility ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn ServerMobility OFF  
- Display current ServerMobility configuration  
The following table describes the Server Mobility Configuration menu options.  
Table 159 Server Mobility Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
Displays the Server Mobility port menu.  
port <port number>  
Resets the Server Mobility parameters to their factory default values.  
Configures a port as a Server Mobility port.  
default  
add <port number>  
rem <port number>  
Removes the port from Server Mobility.  
filter enable|disable  
Enables or disables filtering DHCP request information on the port.  
When enabled, DHCP requests from the server are filtered, so that  
the DHCP server receives only DHCP requests from the  
HP 1:10 GbE switch.  
nsmrelay enable|disable  
Enables or disables BOOTP Relay for all ports that have Server  
Mobility disabled. The default value is disabled.  
on  
Globally turns Server Mobility on.  
off  
cur  
Globally turns Server Mobility off.  
Displays the current Server Mobility settings.  
Configuration Menu 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Server Mobility port configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/sm/port <port number>  
[Port 20 Menu]  
addback - Set backup port  
remback - Remove backup port  
cur  
- Display current configuration  
The following table describes the Server Mobility port Configuration menu options.  
Table 160 Server Mobility Configuration menu options  
Command  
Description  
Configures a backup port for the selected port.  
addback <port number>  
The server connected to the backup port acts as a backup to the server  
connected to this port. The backup server uses the same IP address as the  
active server.  
Deletes a backup port for the selected port.  
remback <port number>  
cur  
Displays the current Server Mobility port settings.  
Configuration Menu 182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp  
[Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu]  
vr  
group  
if  
- VRRP Virtual Router Menu  
- VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu  
- VRRP Interface Menu  
track  
on  
- VRRP Priority Tracking Menu  
- Globally turn VRRP ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn VRRP OFF  
- Display current VRRP configuration  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the HP 10GbE switch provides redundancy  
between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and  
ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then  
elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared  
virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing  
authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.  
By default, VRRP is disabled. For more information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in the  
HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application Guide.  
The following table describes the VRRP Configuration Menu options.  
Table 161 VRRP Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
vr <1-250>  
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring virtual  
routers on this switch.  
group  
Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers  
together as one logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or  
more switches in a hot-standby failover configuration where only one switch is active  
at any given time.  
if <1-249>  
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu.  
track  
Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used  
when modifying priority levels in the master router election process.  
on  
Globally enables VRRP on this switch.  
Globally disables VRRP on this switch.  
Displays the current VRRP parameters.  
off  
cur  
Configuration Menu 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VRRP Virtual Router configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <1-250>  
[VRRP Virtual Router 1 Menu]  
track  
vrid  
addr  
if  
- Priority Tracking Menu  
- Set virtual router ID  
- Set IP address  
- Set interface number  
prio  
adver  
preem  
ena  
- Set renter priority  
- Set advertisement interval  
- Enable/disable preemption  
- Enable virtual router  
dis  
del  
- Disable virtual router  
- Delete virtual router  
cur  
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration  
This menu is used for configuring virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by its virtual  
router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for  
this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.  
Virtual routers are disabled by default.  
The following table describes the Virtual Router Configuration Menu options.  
Table 162 Virtual Router Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
track  
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is a  
proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority  
system used for electing the master router.  
vrid <1-250>  
Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr(below) to  
define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled  
routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each  
participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router:  
one that shares the same vridand addrcombination.  
The vridfor standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is  
not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 250.  
The default value is 1.  
All vridvalues must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s  
IP interface belongs.  
addr <IP address>  
if <1-249>  
Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation.  
This is used in conjunction with the vrid(above) to configure the same  
virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is  
0.0.0.0.  
Selects a switch IP interface. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the  
addroption above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined  
virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will  
always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another  
virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption  
occurs even if the preemoption below is disabled. The default value is 1.  
Configuration Menu 184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 162 Virtual Router Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
prio <1-254>  
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any  
integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100.  
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest  
virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest  
IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same  
as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will  
automatically be set to 255 (highest).  
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/trackor  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr#/track), this base priority value can be modified  
according to a number of performance and operational criteria.  
adver <1-255>  
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be  
any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1.  
preem disable|enable  
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is  
in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual  
router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that  
even when preemis disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any  
other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual  
router addrare the same). By default, this option is enabled.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables this virtual router.  
Disables this virtual router.  
Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.  
Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.  
VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <1-250>/track  
[VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu]  
vrs  
- Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers  
ifs  
ports  
cur  
- Enable/disable tracking other interfaces  
- Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports  
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration  
This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool  
of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of  
the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined  
through the VRRP Tracking Menu.  
Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. If  
the virtual router preemption option is enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority  
when its priority level rises above that of the current master.  
Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and portsbelow) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise  
called virtual interface routers. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address  
(addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.  
Configuration Menu 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table describes the Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options.  
Table 163 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
vrs disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each  
virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that  
traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch,  
increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by  
default.  
ifs disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each  
other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active  
when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the  
virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is  
disabled by default.  
ports disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each  
active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered active if it has a link and is  
forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available  
ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.  
VRRP Virtual Router Group configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp/group  
[VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu]  
track  
vrid  
if  
- Priority Tracking Menu  
- Set virtual router ID  
- Set interface number  
prio  
adver  
preem  
ena  
- Set renter priority  
- Set advertisement interval  
- Enable/disable preemption  
- Enable virtual router  
dis  
- Disable virtual router  
del  
- Delete virtual router  
cur  
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration  
The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual  
router, which forces all virtual routers on the switch to either be master or backup as a group. A  
virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing  
device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share  
the same virtual router ID and IP address.  
Configuration Menu 186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table describes the Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu options.  
Table 164 Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
track  
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group.  
Tracking is a proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard  
priority system used for electing the master router.  
vrid <1-250>  
Defines the virtual router ID.  
The vridfor standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is  
not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 250.  
All vridvalues must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s  
IP interface (see ifbelow) belongs. The default virtual router ID is 1.  
if <1-249>  
Selects a switch IP interface. The default switch IP interface number is 1.  
prio <1-254>  
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any  
integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100.  
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest  
virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest  
IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same  
as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will  
automatically be set to 255 (highest).  
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/trackor  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr#/track), this base priority value can be modified  
according to a number of performance and operational criteria.  
adver <1-255>  
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be  
any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default is 1.  
preem disable|enable  
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if the virtual router  
group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master,  
this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control.  
Note that even when preemis disabled, this virtual router will always  
preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address  
and virtual router addrare the same). By default, this option is enabled.  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
Enables the virtual router group.  
Disables the virtual router group.  
Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.  
Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.  
Configuration Menu 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VRRP Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track  
[Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu]  
ifs  
ports  
cur  
- Enable/disable tracking other interfaces  
- Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports  
- Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration  
NOTE: If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, the tracking option will be available only under  
groupoption. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.  
The following table describes the Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options.  
Table 165 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
ifs disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each  
other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active  
when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the  
virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is  
disabled by default.  
ports disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each  
active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered active if it has a link and  
is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available  
ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.  
VRRP Interface configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <1-249>  
[VRRP Interface 1 Menu]  
auth  
passw  
del  
- Set authentication types  
- Set plain-text password  
- Delete interface  
cur  
- Display current VRRP interface configuration  
This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the  
virtual routers. The interface-number represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters  
must be configured.  
The following table describes the VRRP Interface Configuration Menu options.  
Table 166 VRRP Interface Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
auth none|password  
Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none(no authentication), or  
password(password authentication).  
passw <password>  
Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be  
added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password  
authentication is chosen (see authabove).  
del  
Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP  
interface itself is not deleted.  
Configuration Menu 188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 166 VRRP Interface Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
cur  
Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.  
VRRP Tracking configuration  
Command: /cfg/l3/vrrp/track  
[VRRP Tracking Menu]  
vrs  
- Set priority increment for virtual router tracking  
ifs  
ports  
cur  
- Set priority increment for IP interface tracking  
- Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking  
- Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration  
This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the  
master router election process. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the  
virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu.  
NOTE: These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not affect the  
VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking  
Menu are enabled.  
The following table describes the VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu options.  
Table 167 VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
vrs <0-254>  
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode  
detected on this switch. The default value is 2.  
ifs <0-254>  
ports <0-254>  
cur  
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on  
this switch. The default value is 2.  
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active ports on the virtual  
router’s VLAN. The default value is 2.  
Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values.  
Configuration Menu 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quality of Service configuration  
Command: /cfg/qos  
[QOS Menu]  
8021p  
- 802.1p Menu  
Use the Quality of Service (QoS) menus to configure the IEEE 802.1p priority value of incoming  
packets. This allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic, and provide different priority  
levels. The following table describes the QoS Configuration Menu options.  
Table 168 QoS Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
8021p  
Displays 802.1p configuration menu.  
QoS 802.1p configuration  
Command: /cfg/qos/8021p  
[802.1p Menu]  
priq  
- Set priority to COS queue mapping  
qweight - Set weight to a COS queue  
numcos - Set number of COS queue  
default - Reset 802.1p configuration to default values.  
cur  
- Display current 802.1p configuration  
This feature provides the HP 10GbE switch the capability to filter IP packets based on the IEEE  
802.1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to  
the packets while forwarding them. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given  
forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.  
The following table describes the 802.1p Configuration Menu options.  
Table 169 802.1p Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
priq <0-7>  
<queue (0-1)|(0-7)>  
Maps the 802.1p priority of to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority.  
Enter the 802.1p priority value (0-7); followed by the Class of Service queue  
that handles the matching traffic.  
qweight <queue (0-1)|  
(0-7)> <weight (0-15)>  
Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter  
the queue number, followed by the scheduling weight (0-15).  
numcos 2|8  
Sets the number of Class of Service queues for switch ports.  
The default value is 2.  
default  
cur  
Resets 802.1p configuration to default values.  
Displays the current 802.1p parameters.  
Configuration Menu 190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Control configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl  
[ACL Menu]  
acl  
- Access Control List Item Config Menu  
group  
cur  
- Access Control List Group Config Menu  
- Display current ACL configuration  
Use this menu to create Access Control Lists (ACLs) and ACL Groups. ACLs define matching criteria  
used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions.  
The following table describes the Access Control Configuration Menu options.  
Table 170 Access Control Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
acl <1-384>  
Displays Access Control List (ACL) configuration menu.  
Displays ACL Group configuration menu.  
Displays the current Access Control parameters.  
group <1-384>  
cur  
Access Control List configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>  
[ACL 1 Menu]  
ethernet - Ethernet Header Options Menu  
ipv4 - IP Header Options Menu  
tcpudp - TCP/UDP Header Options Menu  
meter - ACL Metering Configuration Menu  
re-mark - ACL Re-mark Configuration Menu  
pktfmt - Set to filter specific packet format types  
egrport - Set to filter for packets egressing this port  
action - Set filter action  
stats  
reset  
cur  
- Enable/disable statistics for this acl  
- Reset filtering parameters  
- Display current filter configuration  
These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List (ACL). The following  
table describes the ACL Configuration Menu options.  
Table 171 ACL Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
ethernet  
Displays the ACL Ethernet configuration menu.  
Displays the ACL IP version 4 configuration menu.  
Displays the ACL TCP/UDP configuration menu.  
Displays the ACL meter configuration menu.  
Displays the ACL re-mark configuration menu.  
Displays the ACL Packet Format configuration menu.  
ipv4  
tcpudp  
meter  
re-mark  
pktfmt  
Configuration Menu 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 171 ACL Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
egrport <port number>  
Configures the ACL to function on egress packets. The egress  
port ACL will not match a Layer 2 broadcast or multicast packet.  
The egress port ACL will not match packets if the destination port  
is a trunk.  
action permit|deny|setprio <0-7>  
Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL  
definitions. You can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop)  
packets, or set the 802.1p priority for the packets.  
stats e|d  
reset  
Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control  
List.  
Resets the ACL parameters to their default values and removes  
the ACL from all ports to which it is assigned.  
cur  
Displays the current ACL parameters.  
ACL Ethernet Filter configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/ethernet  
[Filtering Ethernet Menu]  
smac  
dmac  
vlan  
etype  
pri  
- Set to filter on source MAC  
- Set to filter on destination MAC  
- Set to filter on VLAN ID  
- Set to filter on ethernet type  
- Set to filter on priority  
- Reset all fields  
reset  
cur  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL. The following table describes  
the Ethernet Filter Configuration Menu options.  
Table 172 Ethernet Filter Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
smac <MAC address> <MAC mask>  
Defines the source MAC address and MAC mask for  
this ACL. For example:  
00:60:cf:40:56:00 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:fc  
dmac <MAC address> <MAC mask>  
Defines the destination MAC address and MAC  
mask for this ACL. For example:  
00:60:cf:40:56:00 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:fc  
vlan <1-4095> <VLAN mask (0xfff)>  
Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL.  
Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL.  
etype ARP|IP|IPv6|MPLS|RARP|any|0xXXXX  
pri <0-7>  
Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL.  
reset  
Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their  
default values.  
cur  
Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the  
ACL.  
Configuration Menu 192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACL IP Version 4 Filter configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/ipv4  
[Filtering IPv4 Menu]  
sip  
- Set to filter on source IP address  
dip  
proto  
tos  
- Set to filter on destination IP address  
- Set to filter on protocol  
- Set to filter on TOS  
reset  
cur  
- Reset all fields  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL. The following table describes the IP  
version 4 Filter Configuration Menu options.  
Table 173 IPv4 Filter Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
sip <IP address> <IP mask>  
Defines a source IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this  
source IP address will match this ACL. Specify an IP address in dotted  
decimal notation. For example, 100.10.1.1.  
dip <IP address> <IP mask>  
proto <0-255>  
Defines a destination IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this  
destination IP address will match this ACL. For example, 100.10.1.2.  
Defines an IP protocol for the ACL. If defined, traffic from the specified  
protocol matches this filter. Specify the protocol number. Some of the  
well-known protocols include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
1—icmp  
2—igmp  
6—tcp  
17—udp  
89—ospf  
112—vrrp  
tos <0-255>  
Defines a Type of Service value for the ACL. For more information on  
ToS, see RFC 1340 and 1349.  
reset  
cur  
Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
Displays the current IPV4 parameters.  
Configuration Menu 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACL TCP/UDP Filter configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/tcpudp  
[Filtering TCP/UDP Menu]  
sport  
dport  
flags  
reset  
cur  
- Set to filter on TCP/UDP source port  
- Set to filter on TCP/UDP destination port  
- Set to filter TCP/UDP flags  
- Reset all fields  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL. The following table describes  
the TCP/UDP Filter Configuration Menu options.  
Table 174 TCP/UDP Filter Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
sport <1-65535> <port mask>  
Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified  
TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL. Specify the port number.  
Some of the well-known ports include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Number—Name  
20—ftp-data  
21—ftp  
22—ssh  
23—telnet  
25—smtp  
37—time  
42—name  
43—whois  
53—domain  
69—tftp  
70—gopher  
79—finger  
80—http  
dport <1-65535>  
Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the  
specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the  
port number, just as with sport above.  
flags <value (0x0-0x3f)>  
Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL.  
reset  
cur  
Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.  
Configuration Menu 194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACL Meter configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/meter  
[Metering Menu]  
cir  
- Set committed rate in KiloBits/s  
mbsize - Set maximum burst size in KiloBits  
enable - Enable/disable port metering  
dpass  
reset  
cur  
- Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic  
- Reset meter parameters  
- Display current settings  
This menu defines the metering profile for the selected ACL.  
Table 175 ACL Meter Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
cir <1000-10000000>  
Configures the committed rate, in Kilobits per second. The committed rate must be  
a multiple of 1,000.  
mbsize <32-4096>  
Configures the maximum burst size, in Kilobits. Enter one of the following values  
for mbsize: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, or 4096.  
enable e|d  
dpass drop|pass  
reset  
Enables or disables metering on the ACL.  
Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out-of-profile traffic.  
Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values.  
Displays the current ACL metering parameters.  
cur  
ACL Re-mark configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/re-mark  
[Re-mark Menu]  
inprof - In Profile Menu  
outprof - Out Profile Menu  
reset  
cur  
- Reset re-mark settings  
- Display current settings  
You can choose to re-mark IP header data for the selected ACL. You can configure different remark  
values, based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profile, or out of the ACL Metering  
profile.  
Table 176 ACL Re-mark Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
inprof  
Displays the Re-mark In-Profile Menu.  
Displays the Re-mark Out-of-Profile Menu.  
Reset ACL Re-mark parameters to their default values.  
Displays the current ACL re-mark parameters.  
outprof  
reset  
cur  
Configuration Menu 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACL Re-mark In-Profile configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/re-mark/inprof  
[Re-marking - In Profile Menu]  
up1p  
- Set Update User Priority Menu  
updscp - Set the update DSCP  
reset  
cur  
- Reset in profile settings  
- Display current settings  
Table 177 ACL Re-mark In-Profile Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
up1p  
Displays the Re-Mark In-Profile Update User Priority Menu.  
updscp <0-63>  
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of In-Profile packets to the selected  
value.  
reset  
cur  
Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values.  
Displays the current ACL re-mark in-profile parameters.  
ACL Re-mark In-Profile Update User Priority configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/re-mark/inprof/up1p  
[Update User Priority Menu]  
value  
utosp  
reset  
cur  
- Set the update user priority  
- Enable/Disable use of TOS precedence  
- Reset in profile up1p settings  
- Display current settings  
Table 178 ACL Update User Priority Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
value <0-7>  
Defines 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet  
structure.  
utosp enable|disable  
Enable or disable mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.1p priority  
for In-Profile packets. When enabled, the TOS value is used to set the 802.1p  
value.  
reset  
cur  
Resets UP1P settings to their default values.  
Displays the current ACL Update User Priority parameters.  
Configuration Menu 196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACL Re-mark Out-of-Profile configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/re-mark/outprof  
[Re-marking - Out Of Profile Menu]  
updscp - Set the update DSCP  
reset  
cur  
- Reset out of profile settings  
- Display current settings  
Table 179 ACL Re-mark Out-of-Profile Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
updscp <0-63>  
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of Out-of-Profile packets to the selected value.  
The switch sets the DSCP value on Out-of-Profile packets.  
reset  
cur  
Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out-of-Profile packets to their default values.  
Displays the current ACL re-mark out-profile parameters.  
ACL Packet Format configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/acl <1-384>/pktfmt  
[Filtering Packet Format Menu]  
ethfmt - Set to filter on ethernet format  
tagfmt - Set to filter on ethernet tagging format  
reset  
cur  
- Reset all fields  
- Display current parameters  
The following table describes the Packet Format Configuration Menu options.  
Table 180 Packet Format Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
ethfmt eth2|snap|llc  
Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL.  
tagfmt none|tagged  
Defines the tagging format for the ACL.  
reset  
cur  
Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.  
Configuration Menu 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACL Group configuration  
Command: /cfg/acl/group <1-384>  
[ACL Group 1 Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add ACL to group  
- Remove ACL from group  
- Display current ACL items in group  
This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group. Once you create an ACL  
Group, you can assign the ACL Group to one or more ports.  
The following table describes the ACL Group Configuration Menu options.  
Table 181 ACL Group Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add acl <1-384>  
Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Group. You can add up to 96 ACLs to  
each ACL Group.  
rem acl <1-384>  
Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group.  
Displays the current ACL group parameters.  
cur  
Configuration Menu 198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Monitoring configuration  
Command: /cfg/rmon  
[RMON Menu]  
hist  
- RMON History Menu  
event - RMON Event Menu  
alarm - RMON Alarm Menu  
cur  
- Display current RMON configuration  
Remote Monitoring (RMON) allows you to monitor traffic flowing through the switch. The RMON MIB  
is described in RFC 1757.  
The following table describes the RMON Configuration Menu options.  
Table 182 RMON Menu options  
Command  
Description  
hist  
Displays the RMON History Menu.  
Displays the RMON Event Menu.  
Displays the RMON Alarm Menu.  
Displays the current RMON configuration.  
event  
alarm  
cur  
RMON history configuration  
Command: /cfg/rmon/hist <1-65535>  
[RMON History 1 Menu]  
ifoid - Set interface MIB object to monitor  
rbnum - Set the number of requested buckets  
intrval - Set polling interval  
owner - Set owner for the RMON group of statistics  
delete - Delete this history and restore defaults  
cur  
- Display current history configuration  
The following table describes the RMON History Menu options.  
Table 183 RMON History Menu options  
Command  
Description  
ifoid <1-127 characters>  
Configures the interface MIB Object Identifier. The IFOID must correspond  
to the standard interface OID, as follows:  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.x  
where xis the ifIndex (1-16, 18-21)  
The interface OID can have a maximum of 127 characters.  
rbnum <1-65535>  
intrval <1-3600>  
Configures the requested number of buckets, which is the number of  
discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved.  
The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 30.  
The maximum number of buckets that can be granted is 50.  
Configures the time interval over which the data is sampled for each  
bucket.  
The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds. The default value is 1800 seconds.  
Configuration Menu 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 183 RMON History Menu options  
Command  
Description  
owner <1-127 characters>  
Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this history  
index.  
The owner can have a maximum of 127 characters.  
delete  
cur  
Deletes the selected history index.  
Displays the current RMON History parameters.  
RMON event configuration  
Command: /cfg/rmon/event <1-65535>  
[RMON Event 1 Menu]  
descn - Set description for the event  
type - Set event type  
owner - Set owner for the event  
delete - Delete this event and restore defaults  
cur  
- Display current event configuration  
The following table describes the RMON Event Menu options.  
Table 184 RMON Event Menu options  
Command  
Description  
descn <1-127 characters>  
Enter a text string to describe the event.  
The description can have a maximum of 127 characters.  
type none|log|trap|both  
Selects the type of notification provided for this event. For log events, an  
entry is made in the log table and sent to the configured syslog host. For  
trap events, an SNMP trap is sent to the management station  
(/cfg/snmp/trap).  
owner <1-127 characters>  
Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this event  
index.  
The owner can have a maximum of 127 characters.  
delete  
cur  
Deletes this event index.  
Displays the current RMON Event parameters.  
Configuration Menu 200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RMON alarm configuration  
Command: /cfg/rmon/alarm <1-65535>  
[RMON Alarm 1 Menu]  
oid  
- Set MIB oid datasource to monitor  
intrval - Set alarm interval  
sample - Set sample type  
almtype - Set startup alarm type  
rlimit - Set rising threshold  
flimit - Set falling threshold  
revtidx - Set event index to fire on rising threshold crossing  
fevtidx - Set event index to fire on falling threshold crossing  
owner - Set owner for the alarm  
delete - Delete this alarm and restore defaults  
cur  
- Display current alarm configuration  
The Alarm RMON group can track rising or falling values for a MIB object. The MIB object must be a  
counter, gauge, integer, or time interval. Each alarm index must correspond to an event index that  
triggers once the alarm threshold is crossed.  
The following table describes the RMON Alarm Menu options.  
Table 185 RMON Alarm Menu options  
Command  
Description  
oid <1-127 characters>  
Configures an alarm MIB Object Identifier.  
The alarm OID can have a maximum of 127 characters.  
intrval <1-65535>  
Configures the time interval over which data is sampled and  
compared with the rising and falling thresholds.  
The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 1800  
seconds.  
sample abs|delta  
Configures the method of sampling the selected variable and  
calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds,  
as follows:  
• abs—absolute value, the value of the selected variable is  
compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the  
sampling interval.  
• delta—delta value, the value of the selected variable at  
the last sample is subtracted from the current value, and  
the difference compared with the thresholds.  
almtype rising|falling|either  
Configures the alarm type as rising, falling, or either (rising  
or falling).  
rlimit <-2147483647 to 2147483647>  
Configures the rising threshold for the sampled statistic.  
When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to  
this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was  
less than this threshold, a single event is generated.  
flimit <-2147483647 to 2147483647>  
Configures the falling threshold for the sampled statistic.  
When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this  
threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was  
greater than this threshold, a single event is generated.  
Configuration Menu 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 185 RMON Alarm Menu options  
Command  
Description  
revtidx <0-65535>  
Configures the rising alarm event index that is triggered  
when a rising threshold is crossed.  
The range is from 0 to 65535. The default value is 0.  
fevtidx <0-65535>  
Configures the falling alarm event index that is triggered  
when a falling threshold is crossed.  
The range is from 0 to 65535. The default value is 0.  
owner <1-127 characters>  
Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses  
this alarm index.  
The owner can have a maximum of 127 characters.  
delete  
cur  
Deletes this alarm index.  
Displays the current RMON Alarm parameters.  
Port mirroring  
Command: /cfg/pmirr  
[Port Mirroring Menu]  
mirror - Enable/Disable Mirroring  
monport - Monitoring Port based PM Menu  
cur - Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports  
The Port Mirroring Configuration Menu is used to configure, enable, and disable the monitored port.  
When enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent  
to a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port, you can collect detailed  
information about your network performance and usage. Port mirroring is disabled by default.  
NOTE: See the “Troubleshooting tools” appendix in the HP 10Gb Ethernet BL-c Switch Application  
Guide for information on how to use port mirroring.  
The following table describes the Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options.  
Table 186 Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
mirror disable|enable  
Enables or disables port mirroring  
Displays port mirroring menu.  
monport <port number>  
cur  
Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.  
Configuration Menu 202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port-based port mirroring  
Command: /cfg/pmirr/monport <port number>  
[Port 1 Menu]  
add  
rem  
- Add "Mirrored" port  
- Rem "Mirrored" port  
delete - Delete this “Monitor” port  
cur - Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration  
The following table describes the port-based Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options.  
Table 187 Port Mirroring Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
add <mirrored port> in|out|both  
Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to  
enter the direction of the traffic. It is necessary to specify the  
direction because:  
•
If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and  
the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress),  
the frame is sent to the mirrored port.  
•
If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port  
and the mirrored direction is egress or both, the frame is sent  
to the monitoring port.  
rem <mirrored port>  
Removes the mirrored port.  
delete  
cur  
Deletes this monitored port.  
Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.  
Configuration Menu 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Uplink Failure Detection configuration  
Command: /cfg/ufd  
[Uplink Failure Detection Menu]  
fdp - Failure Detection Pair Menu  
on - Globally turn Uplink Failure Detection ON  
off - Globally turn Uplink Failure Detection OFF  
cur - Display current Uplink Failure Detection configuration  
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) supports network fault tolerance in network adapter teams. Use this  
menu to configure a Failure Detection Pair of one Links to Monitor (LtM) group and one Links to  
Disable (LtD) group. When UFD is enabled and a Failure Detection Pair is configured, the switch  
automatically disables ports in the LtD if it detects a failure in the LtM. The failure conditions which are  
monitored in the LtM group include port link state moving to down, or port state moving to Blocking if  
Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled.  
The following table describes the Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Configuration Menu options.  
Table 188 Uplink Failure Detection Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
fdp  
Displays the Failure Detection Pair menu.  
Globally turns Uplink Failure Detection ON.  
Globally turns Uplink Failure Detection OFF.  
Displays the current Uplink Failure Detection configuration parameters.  
on  
off  
cur  
Failure Detection Pair configuration  
Command: /cfg/ufd/fdp  
[FDP Menu]  
ltm  
ltd  
ena  
dis  
- Link to Monitor Menu  
- Link to Disable Menu  
- Enable FDP  
- Disable FDP  
current - Display current FDP configuration  
Use these commands to configure a Failure Detection Pair, which consists of one Link to Monitor (LtM)  
and one Link to Disable (LtD). When the switch detects a failure on the LtM, it automatically disables  
the ports in the LtD.  
The following table describes the Failure Detection Pair (FDP) Configuration Menu options.  
Table 189 Failure Detection Pair Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
ltm  
Displays the Links to Monitor menu.  
Displays the Links to Disable menu.  
Enables the FDP Parameters.  
Disables the FDP Parameters.  
ltd  
ena  
dis  
Configuration Menu 204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 189 Failure Detection Pair Configuration Menu options  
Command  
Description  
current  
Displays the current FDP configuration.  
Link to Monitor configuration  
Command: /cfg/ufd/fdp/ltm  
[Failure Link to Monitor Menu]  
addport - Add port to Link to Monitor  
remport - Remove port from Link to Monitor  
addtrnk - Add trunk to Link to Monitor  
remtrnk - Remove trunk from Link to Monitor  
addkey - Add adminkey to Link to Monitor  
remkey - Remove adminkey from Link to Monitor  
cur  
- Display current LtM configuration  
The following table describes the Link to Monitor (LtM) Menu options. The LtM can consist of only one  
uplink port (ports 18-21) or a single trunk containing only uplink ports.  
Table 190 Link to Monitor Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addport <port number>  
Adds a port to the LtM. Only uplink ports (18-21) are allowed in the  
LtM.  
remport <port number>  
addtrnk <1-12>  
Removes a port from the LtM.  
Adds a trunk group to the LtM. The LtM trunk group can contain only  
uplink ports (18-21).  
remtrnk <1-12>  
Removes a trunk group from the LtM.  
addkey <1-65535>  
Adds a LACP admin key to the LtM. LACP trunks formed with this  
admin key will be included in the LtM.  
remkey <1-65535>  
Removes a LACP admin key from the LtM.  
Displays the current LtM configuration.  
cur  
Configuration Menu 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Link to Disable configuration  
Command: /cfg/ufd/fdp/ltd  
[Failure Link to Disable Menu]  
addport - Add port to Link to Disable  
remport - Remove port from Link to Disable  
addtrnk - Add trunk to Link to Disable  
remtrnk - Remove trunk from Link to Disable  
addkey - Add adminkey to Link to Disable  
remkey - Remove adminkey from Link to Disable  
cur  
- Display current LtD configuration  
The following table describes the Link to Disable (LtD) Menu options. The LtD can consist of any mix of  
downlink ports (ports 1-16) and trunk groups that contain only downlink ports.  
Table 191 Link to Disable Menu options  
Command  
Description  
addport <port number>  
Adds a port to the current LtD group. Only downlink ports (1-16) are  
allowed in the LtD.  
remport <port number>  
addtrunk <1-12>  
Removes a port from the current LtD group.  
Adds a trunk group to the current LtD group. LtD trunk groups can contain  
only downlink ports (1-16).  
remtrunk <1-12>  
addkey <1-65535>  
Removes a trunk group from the current LtD group.  
Adds a LACP admin key to the LtD. LACP trunks formed with this admin  
key will be included in the LtD.  
remkey <1-65535>  
Removes a LACP admin key from the LtD.  
Displays the current LtD configuration.  
cur  
Configuration Menu 206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dump  
Command: /cfg/dump  
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the dump  
program, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# dump  
The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The  
screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to configure  
other switches. Paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of  
the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via FTP/TFTP.  
Saving the active switch configuration  
Command: /cfg/ptcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>  
When the ptcfgcommand is used, the active configuration commands of the switch (as displayed  
using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. To  
start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# ptcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>  
Where <FTP/TFTP server>is the FTP or TFTP server IP address or hostname and <filename> is  
the name of the target script configuration file.  
NOTE: The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns. The file cannot be  
viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).  
NOTE: If the TFTP server is running SunOS™ or the Solaris™ operating system, the specified ptcfg  
file must exist prior to executing the ptcfgcommand and must be writable (set with proper  
permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced  
with the current configuration data.  
Restoring the active switch configuration  
Command: /cfg/gtcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>  
When the gtcfgcommand is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands  
found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial  
configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfgis not activated until the applycommand is  
used. If the applycommand is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command, the  
apply action will be performed automatically.  
To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# gtcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>  
Where <FTP/TFTP server>is the FTP/TFTP server IP address or hostname and <filename>is  
the name of the target script configuration file.  
NOTE: The switch supports three configuration files: active, backup, and factory. See the “Selecting  
a configuration block” section in the “Boot Options Menu” chapter for information on how to set  
which configuration file to use upon boot up.  
Configuration Menu 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operations Menu  
Introduction  
Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch  
configuration. The Operations Menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. This  
menu is available only from an administrator and operator login.  
Menu information  
Command: /oper  
[Operations Menu]  
port  
vrrp  
- Operational Port Menu  
- Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu  
passwd - Change current user password  
clrlog - Clear syslog messages  
ntpreq - Send NTP request  
The following table describes the Operations Menu options.  
Table 192 Operations Menu options  
Command  
Description  
port <port number>  
Displays the Operational Port Menu.  
Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu.  
vrrp  
passwd <1-128 characters>  
Allows the user to change the password. You need to enter the current  
password in use for validation.  
clrlog  
ntpreq  
Clears all Syslog messages.  
Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server.  
Operations-level port options  
Command: /oper/port <port number>  
[Operations Port 1 Menu]  
8021x  
rmon  
ena  
- 802.1x Menu  
- Enable/Disable RMON for port  
- Enable port  
dis  
- Disable port  
cur  
- Current port state  
Operations Menu 208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port.  
Table 193 Operations-Level Port Menu options  
Command  
Description  
8021x  
Displays the 802.1X Port Menu.  
rmon disable|enable  
Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port. RMON must be enabled for  
any RMON configurations to function.  
ena  
Temporarily enables the port. The port will be returned to its configured  
operation mode when the switch is reset.  
This command does not enable a port that has been disabled by an ekeying  
mismatch error.  
dis  
cur  
Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured  
operation mode when the switch is reset.  
Displays the current settings for the port.  
Operations-level port 802.1X options  
Command: /oper/port <port number>/8021x  
[802.1X Operation Menu]  
reset  
- Reinitialize 802.1X access control on this port  
reauth - Initiate reauthentication on this port now  
Operations-level port 802.1X options are used to temporarily set 802.1X parameters for a port.  
Table 194 Operations-Level Port 802.1X Menu options  
Command  
Description  
reset  
Re-initializes the 802.1X access-control parameters for the port. The following actions  
take place, depending on the 802.1X port configuration:  
• force unauth—the port is placed in unauthorized state, and traffic is blocked.  
• auto—the port is placed in unauthorized state, then authentication is initiated.  
• force auth—the port is placed in authorized state, and authentication is not  
required.  
reauth  
Re-authenticates the supplicant (client) attached to the port. This command only applies  
if the port’s 802.1X mode is configured as auto.  
Operations Menu 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operations-level VRRP options  
Command: /oper/vrrp  
[VRRP Operations Menu]  
back  
- Set virtual router to backup  
Operations-level VRRP options are described in the following table.  
Table 195 Operations-Level VRRP Menu options  
Command  
Description  
back <1-255>  
Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode.  
This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch  
once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. When  
this command is executed, the current master gives up control and initiates a  
new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest).  
After the new election, the virtual router forced into backup mode by this  
command will resume master control in the following cases:  
•
•
•
This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router  
and its IP interface are the same)  
This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is  
enabled.  
There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.  
Operations Menu 210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Boot Options Menu  
Introduction  
You must be logged in to the switch as the administrator to use the Boot Options Menu.  
The Boot Options Menu provides options for:  
•
•
•
Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset.  
Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset.  
Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP/TFTP.  
Menu information  
Command: /boot  
[Boot Options Menu]  
image - Select software image to use on next boot  
conf - Select config block to use on next boot  
mode - Select CLI mode to use on next boot  
prompt - Prompt for selectable boot mode  
gtimg - Download new software image via FTP/TFTP  
ptimg - Upload selected software image via FTP/TFTP  
reset - Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree]  
cur  
- Display current boot options  
Each of the Boot Options Menu commands is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.  
Updating the switch software image  
The switch software image is the executable code running on the switch. A version of the image ships  
with the switch, and comes pre-installed on the device. As new versions of the image are released,  
you can upgrade the software running on the switch.  
Upgrading the software image on the switch requires the following:  
•
•
•
Loading the new image onto a FTP/TFTP server on your network  
Downloading the new image from the FTP/TFTP server to the switch  
Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is  
reset  
Downloading new software to the switch  
The switch can store up to two different software images, called image1 and image2, as well as boot  
software, called boot. When you download new software, you must specify where it should be  
placed: either into image1, image2, or boot.  
For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would probably load the new  
image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image  
(stored in image1), if needed.  
Boot Options Menu 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To download new software to the switch, you will need the following:  
•
•
•
•
The image or boot software loaded on a FTP or TFTP server on your network  
The hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server  
The user name and password for FTP server, if necessary  
The name of the new software image or boot file  
NOTE: The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. See the “Domain name  
system configuration” section in the “Configuration Menu” chapter.  
When the above requirements are met, use the following procedure to download the new software to  
your HP 10GbE switch.  
1.  
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# gtimg  
2.  
Enter the name of the HP 10GbE switch software to be replaced:  
Enter name of switch software image to be replaced  
["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image>  
3.  
4.  
Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server:  
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <server name or IP  
address>  
Enter the name of the new software file on the server:  
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>  
The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. However, the file location is normally  
relative to the TFTP directory.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Enter the user name, if you are using a FTP server:  
Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: <userID>  
Enter the password for the FTP server (if prompted):  
Enter password for username on FTP server: <password>  
Enter the port type to use for the file transfer:  
Enter the port to use for downloading the image  
["mgt"|"data"]:  
8.  
The system prompts you to confirm your request.  
You should next select a software image to run, as described in the “Selecting a Soft Image to  
Run” section.  
Boot Options Menu 212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.  
If you are loading an image from which you are not currently booted, the system prompts you to  
change the image.  
image2 currently contains Software Version 1.0.1  
that was downloaded at 15:46:36 Wed Mar 21, 2008.  
New download will replace image2 with file "4.0.0_OS.img"  
from TFTP server 10.168.2.4.  
Confirm download operation [y/n]: y  
Invoking TFTP over port 69...  
Starting download...  
File appears valid  
Download in  
progress....................................................  
Image download complete (1333953 bytes)  
Writing to flash...This takes about 90 seconds. Please wait  
Write complete (1333953 bytes), now verifying FLASH...  
Verification of new image2 in FLASH successful.  
image2 now contains Software Version 4.0.0  
Switch is currently set to boot software image1.  
Do you want to change that to the new image2? [y/n] y  
Next boot will use new software image2.  
Selecting a software image to run  
You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the  
next reboot.  
1.  
2.  
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# image  
Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. The system informs  
you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a  
new choice:  
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.  
Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:  
Uploading a software image from the switch  
You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server.  
1.  
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# ptimg  
2.  
The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:  
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded  
["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr>  
<server-filename>  
3.  
Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server:  
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <server name or IP  
address>  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP server:  
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>  
Enter the user name, if you are using a FTP server:  
Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: <userID>  
Enter the password for the FTP server (if prompted):  
Enter password for username on FTP server: <password>  
Boot Options Menu 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7.  
The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded,  
enter y.  
image2 currently contains Software Version 4.0.0  
Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test"  
on TFTP server 10.1.1.1.  
Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y  
Selecting a configuration block  
When you make configuration changes to the switch, you must save the changes so that they are  
retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you execute the savecommand, your new  
configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is  
copied into the backup configuration block.  
There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when  
the switch was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch  
configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured switch is moved to a  
network environment where it will be re-configured for a different purpose.  
Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next  
time it is reset:  
1.  
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# conf  
2.  
Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use.  
The system indicates which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and  
prompts you to enter a new choice:  
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset.  
Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:  
Resetting the switch  
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.  
Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. This process can be lengthy,  
depending on the topology of your network.  
To reset the switch, at the Boot Options# prompt, enter:  
>> Boot Options# reset  
You are prompted to confirm your request.  
To display current boot options, enter:  
>> Boot Options# cur  
Boot Options Menu 214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessing the ISCLI  
To access the ISCLI, enter the following command from the AOS CLI, and reset the switch:  
Boot Options# mode iscli  
The default command-line interface for the HP 10GbE switch is the AOS CLI. To access the AOS CLI,  
enter the following command and reset the switch:  
>> Switch# boot cli-mode aos  
Users can select the CLI mode upon login, if the /boot/promptcommand is enabled. Only an  
administrator connected through the console port can view and enable /boot/prompt. When  
/boot/promptis enabled, the first user to log in can select the CLI mode. Subsequent users must use  
the selected CLI mode, until all users have logged out.  
Boot Options Menu 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Menu  
Introduction  
The Maintenance Menu is used for debugging purposes, enabling you to generate a technical  
support dump of the critical state information in the switch, and to clear entries in the Forwarding  
Database and the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and routing tables. This menu is available only  
from an administrator and operator login.  
Menu information  
Command: /maint  
[Maintenance Menu]  
sys  
fdb  
- System Maintenance Menu  
- Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu  
debug - Debugging Menu  
arp  
- ARP Cache Manipulation Menu  
route - IP Route Manipulation Menu  
igmp  
- IGMP Multicast Group Menu  
uudmp - Uuencode FLASH dump  
ptdmp - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP  
ptfile - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP  
cldmp - Clear FLASH dump  
panic - Dump state information to FLASH and reboot  
tsdmp - Tech support dump  
pttsdmp - Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP  
Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the switch after  
any one of the following occurs:  
•
The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The panic option, found in the Maintenance  
Menu, causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory, and then causes the switch  
to reboot.  
•
•
The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination (Ctrl-Shift-6) on a device that is  
attached to the console port.  
The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.  
The following table describes the Maintenance Menu options.  
Table 196 Maintenance Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
sys  
Displays the System Maintenance Menu.  
Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu.  
Displays the Debug Menu.  
fdb  
debug  
arp  
Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu.  
Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu.  
route  
Maintenance Menu 216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 196 Maintenance Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
igmp  
Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu.  
uudmp  
ptdmp  
ptfile  
cldmp  
panic  
tsdmp  
pttsdmp  
Displays dump information in uuencoded format.  
Saves the system dump information via FTP/TFTP.  
Saves a specified file from the switch root file system to an FTP/TFTP server.  
Clears dump information from flash memory.  
Dumps MP information to flash and reboots.  
Dumps all switch information, statistics, and configuration.  
Redirects the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external FTP/TFTP server.  
System maintenance options  
Command: /maint/sys  
[System Maintenance Menu]  
flags - Set NVRAM flag word  
The System Maintenance Menu is reserved for use by HP technical support. The options are used to  
perform system debugging.  
The following table describes the System Maintenance Menu options.  
Table 197 System Maintenance Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
flags <new NVRAM flags word as  
0xXXXXXXXX>  
Sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by HP  
technical support.  
Maintenance Menu 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Forwarding Database options  
Command: /maint/fdb  
[FDB Manipulation Menu]  
find  
port  
vlan  
dump  
- Show a single FDB entry by MAC address  
- Show FDB entries for a single port  
- Show FDB entries for a single VLAN  
- Show all FDB entries  
clear - Clear entire FDB, then re-add static entries  
The Forwarding Database (FDB) Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a  
MAC address from the Forwarding Database or clear the entire Forwarding Database. This is helpful  
in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.  
The following table describes the FDB Manipulation Menu options.  
Table 198 FDB Manipulation Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
find <MAC address> [<1-4094>]  
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are  
prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC  
address using one of the following:  
• xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xxformat (for example:  
08:00:20:12:34:56)  
• xxxxxxxxxxxxformat (for example: 080020123456)  
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.  
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.  
port <port number>  
vlan <1-4094>  
dump  
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.  
clear  
Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory, and  
then adds the static entries to the Forwarding Database.  
Debugging options  
Command: /maint/debug  
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu]  
tbuf  
snap  
- Show MP trace buffer  
- Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer  
clrcfg - Clear all flash configs  
The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in  
understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the Debug Menu:  
•
•
Events traced by the management processor (MP)  
Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs  
If the switch resets for any reason, the management processor (MP) trace buffer is saved into the snap  
trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by HP technical support.  
Maintenance Menu 218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table describes the Miscellaneous Debug Menu options:  
Table 199 Miscellaneous Debug Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
tbuf  
Displays the management processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the  
following is shown:  
MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2002; mask: 0x2ffdf748  
The buffer information is displayed after the header.  
snap  
Displays the management processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer. This buffer  
contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred.  
clrcfg  
Deletes all flash configuration blocks. The next time the switch is rebooted, it returns to the  
factory default settings.  
ARP cache options  
Command: /maint/arp  
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]  
find  
port  
vlan  
addr  
dump  
- Show a single ARP entry by IP address  
- Show ARP entries on a single port  
- Show ARP entries on a single VLAN  
- Show ARP entries for switch's interfaces  
- Show all ARP entries  
clear - Clear ARP cache  
The following table describes the Address Resolution Protocol Menu options:  
Table 200 Address Resolution Protocol Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
find <IP address>  
Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. For example, 192.4.17.35.  
Shows ARP entries on a single port.  
port <port number>  
vlan <1-4094>  
addr  
Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.  
Shows the list of IP addresses that the switch will respond to for ARP requests.  
Shows all ARP entries.  
dump  
clear  
Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.  
NOTE: To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch, or a portion according to one of the  
options listed on the menu above (find, port, vlan, dump), see the “ARP information”  
section of the “Information Menu” chapter.  
Maintenance Menu 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Route Manipulation options  
Command: /maint/route  
[IP Routing Menu]  
find  
gw  
type  
tag  
if  
dump  
clear  
- Show a single route by destination IP address  
- Show routes to a single gateway  
- Show routes of a single type  
- Show routes of a single tag  
- Show routes on a single interface  
- Show all routes  
- Clear route table  
The following table describes the IP Route Manipulation Menu options:  
Table 201 IP Route Manipulation Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
find <IP address>  
Shows a single route by destination IP address.  
Shows routes to a default gateway.  
Shows routes of a single type.  
gw <IP address>  
type indirect|direct|local|  
broadcast|martian|multicast  
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|  
ospf|broadcast|martian  
Shows routes of a single tag.  
if <1-250>  
dump  
Shows routes on a single interface.  
Shows all routes.  
clear  
Clears the route table from switch memory.  
IGMP Multicast Group options  
Command: /maint/igmp  
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]  
snoop  
- IGMP Snooping Menu  
mrouter - IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu  
clear  
- Clear group and mrouter tables  
The following table describes the IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu options.  
Table 202 IGMP Multicast Group Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
snoop  
Displays the IGMP Snooping maintenance menu.  
Displays the IGMP Multicast Router maintenance menu.  
Clears IGMP Multicast data from switch memory.  
mrouter  
clear  
Maintenance Menu 220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGMP Snooping options  
Command: /maint/igmp/snoop  
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]  
find  
vlan  
port  
trunk  
- Show a single group by IP group address  
- Show groups on a single vlan  
- Show groups on a single port  
- Show groups on a single trunk  
detail - Show detail of a single group by IP address  
dump  
- Show all groups  
clear  
- Clear group tables  
The following table describes the IGMP Snoop Maintenance Menu options.  
Table 203 IGMP Snooping Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
find <IP address>  
Shows a single IGMP Multicast group by IP address.  
Shows IGMP Multicast groups on a single VLAN.  
Shows IGMP Multicast groups on a single port.  
vlan <1-4094>  
port <port number>  
trunk <1-40>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.  
(To be added-LACP trunks)  
detail <IP address>  
Displays details about IGMP multicast groups, including source and  
timer information.  
dump  
Shows all IGMP Multicast groups.  
clear  
Clears IGMP Multicast data from switch memory.  
IGMP Mrouter options  
Command: /maint/igmp/mrouter  
[IGMP Multicast Routers Menu]  
vlan  
dump  
clear  
- Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan  
- Show all multicast router ports  
- Clear multicast router port table  
The following table describes the IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu options.  
Table 204 IGMP Multicast Group Menu options  
Command  
Usage  
vlan <1-4094>  
Shows IGMP Multicast groups on a single VLAN.  
Shows all IGMP Multicast routers.  
Clears IGMP Multicast router data from switch memory.  
dump  
clear  
Maintenance Menu 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Uuencode flash dump  
Command: /maint/uudmp  
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy  
to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters.  
If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your  
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmpcommand. This will ensure that you do  
not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmpcommand will cause approximately 23,300 lines  
of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file.  
Using the uudmpcommand, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not  
cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory.  
Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be  
written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more information on clearing  
the dump region, see the “Clearing dump information” section later in this chapter.  
To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:  
Maintenance# uudmp  
The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication  
software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following displays:  
No FLASH dump available.  
FTP/TFTP system dump put  
Command: /maint/ptdmp <server> <filename>  
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a FTP or TFTP server.  
NOTE: If the FTP/TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp  
file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper  
permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced  
with the current dump data.  
To save dump information via FTP/TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:  
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename>  
Type the FTP/TFTP server IP address or hostname as <server>, and the target dump file as  
<filename>. You are prompted to choose the port type (data port or management port) to use for  
the file transfer.  
Clearing dump information  
Command: /maint/cldmp  
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:  
Maintenance# cldmp  
The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:  
FLASH dump region cleared.  
If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:  
FLASH dump region is already clear.  
Maintenance Menu 222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Panic command  
Command: /maint/panic  
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and  
automatically reboot.  
To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:  
>> Maintenance# panic  
A FLASH dump already exists.  
Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:  
Enter yto confirm the command:  
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y  
A list of messages is displayed:  
Starting system dump...done.  
Reboot at 11:54:08 Wednesday March 21, 2008...  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rebooted because of console PANIC command.  
Booting complete  
Unscheduled system dumps  
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when  
you log on to the switch:  
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved  
at 13:43:22 Wednesday March 21, 2008. Use /maint/uudmp to  
extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to  
clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared  
before another dump can be saved.  
Maintenance Menu 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
dump information, 222  
commands  
8
802.1x information, 40  
802.1x statistics, 74  
abbreviations, 18  
global commands, 15  
shortcuts, 18  
A
abbreviating commands, 18  
access control, user, 125  
active configuration block, 110, 214  
active switch configuration  
gtcfg, 207  
tab completion, 18  
Common Internal Spanning Tree information, 46  
configuration  
apply changes, 109  
default gateway interval, for health checks, 160  
default gateway IP address, 160  
dump command, 207  
flow control, 133  
ptcfg, 207  
restoring, 207  
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)  
address list, 219  
Gigabit Ethernet, 131  
operating mode, 133  
port mirroring, 202  
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Menu, 53  
aging  
STP information, 43, 45  
apply command, 15, 109  
auto-negotiation  
port trunking, 149  
revert changes, 109  
save changes, 110  
enable/disable on port, 133  
flow control configuration, 133  
switch IP address, 159  
view pending changes, 109  
VLAN default (PVID), 131  
VLAN IP interface, 159  
VLAN tagging, 131  
B
backup configuration block, 110, 214  
banner (system option), 112  
Boot Options Menu, 211  
bootstrap protocol (BOOTP)  
obtain the IP address, 9  
configuration block, 214  
configuring RMON (remote monitoring), 199  
connecting  
BPDU guard  
via console, 9  
configuration, 135  
via Secure Shell (SSH), 10  
via Telnet, 10  
bridge maximum age parameter  
configuration, 145  
console port, connecting, 9  
cost  
information, 43, 45, 47  
bridge parameter menu, for STP, 141  
bridge priority, 43  
STP information, 43, 45, 47  
STP port option, 147  
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU), 43, 45, 47  
bridge Spanning Tree parameters, 145  
D
debugging, 216  
C
default gateway, interval for health checks, 160  
default password  
capture dump information to a file, 222  
clear  
administrator, 20  
ARP entries, 219  
operator, 22  
Index 224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
user, 22  
IGMP Mrouter options, 221  
IGMP Multicast Group options, 220  
IGMP Snooping options, 221  
IGMPv3  
diff command, 15, 109  
diff flash command, 15, 109  
disconnect idle timeout, 12  
download software, 211  
dump  
configuration, 177  
image  
configuration, 207  
information, 71  
download, 211  
software, selection, 213  
information dump, 71  
Information Menu, 24  
interface statistics, 79, 81  
Internet Protocol (IP) statistics, 81  
IP address  
state information, 223  
statistics, 107  
duplex mode, link status, 24, 69  
dynamic routes, 220  
F
ARP information, 53  
BOOTP, 9  
factory configuration block, 214  
factory default configuration, 19  
first-time configuration, 19  
flow control  
default gateway configuration, 160  
active IP interface  
active, 188  
configuration, 133  
IP interface  
display setting, 24  
address configuration, 159  
information, 59  
link status, 69  
Forwarding Database (FDB)  
maintenance, 218  
VLAN configuration, 159  
IP Interface Configuration Menu, 159  
IP Route Manipulation options, 220  
Forwarding Database Information Menu, 37  
Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu, 218  
forwarding state (FWD), 38, 43, 45, 47, 48  
fwd (STP bridge option), 146  
FwdDel (forward delay), bridge port, 43, 45, 47  
L
LACP statistics, 84  
Layer 2 information, 36  
Layer 2 statistics, 84  
Layer 3 information, 50  
Layer 3 statistics, 86  
LEARNING (port state), 43, 45, 47  
lines command, 15  
G
gig (Port Menu option), 131  
Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link, 131  
Gigabit Ethernet, configuration, 131  
global commands, 15  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol information, 38  
link status  
gtcfg (TFTP load command), 207  
H
command, 69  
health checks  
display setting, 24  
default gateway interval, retries, 160  
retry, number of failed health checks, 160  
hello, STP information, 43, 45, 47  
history command, 16  
Hot Links  
duplex mode, 24, 69  
port speed, 24, 69  
log, syslog messages, 113  
login notice, 112  
M
configuration, 155  
Main Menu, 14  
I
Maintenance Menu, 216  
management processor (MP)  
trace buffer, 218  
idle timeout, overview, 12  
IEEE standards, 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol, 42  
Index 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
mask, IP interface subnet address, 159  
MD5 cryptographic authentication, 169  
media access control (MAC) address  
ARP information, 53  
information, 70  
membership of the VLAN, 49  
priority, 43, 45, 47  
STP port priority, 147  
preemption  
display address, 9  
FDB information, 37  
assuming VRRP master routing authority, 185  
priority (STP port option), 147  
prisrv, primary radius server, 115  
Private VLAN  
FDB manipulation, 218  
Miscellaneous Debug Menu, 218  
monitor port, 202  
configuration, 154  
N
Protocol VLAN  
Network Time Protocol (NTP)  
synchronization, 118  
null modem cable, 9  
configuration, 153  
ptcfg (TFTP save command), 207  
pushd command, 16  
O
pwd command, 16  
online help, 15  
Q
operating mode, configuration, 133  
Operations-level port 802.1x options, 209  
Operations-level port options, 208  
Operations-level VRRP options, 210  
ospf  
quiet (screen display option), 16  
R
Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree  
information, 44  
read community string (SNMP option), 119  
reboot, 216, 223  
area index, 168  
interface, 168  
retries, radius server, 115  
retry, health checks for default gateway, 160  
revert apply command, 16, 109  
revert command, 16, 109  
RMON  
Not-So-Stubby Area, 169  
stub area, 169  
transit area, 169  
OSPF configuration, 168  
OSPF information, 54  
alarm information, 67  
P
event information, 68  
panic  
history information, 66  
RMON configuration  
command, 223  
switch, 216  
alarm, 201  
passwords, defaults, 20  
ping command, 16  
popd command, 16  
port configuration, 131  
Port Menu  
event, 200  
history, 199  
RMON Information Menu, 66  
poisoned reverse, as used with split horizon  
poisoned reverse, 166  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)  
version 1 parameters, 162, 165, 166  
split horizon  
configuration options, 132, 133, 134  
Gigabit Ethernet (gig) configuration, 131  
port mirroring, configuration, 202  
port number, 69  
split horizon, 166  
port speed, 24, 69  
port statistics, 73  
S
save command, 16, 110, 214  
save n command, 16  
secret, radius server, 115  
port trunking configuration, 149  
ports  
disable (temporarily), 132  
Index 226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
secsrv, secondary radius server, 115  
Secure Shell (SSH)  
syslog  
display messages, 34  
system  
date and time, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 35, 36,  
encryption and authentication methods, 10  
Secure Shell Server (SSHD) Menu, 114  
Server Mobility  
50, 84  
information, 33, 71  
System Configuration Menu, 111  
System Information Menu, 25  
system options  
configuration, 181  
Setup utility  
introduction, 19  
start, 19  
login banner, 112  
tnport, 112  
shortcuts, 18  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
optional setup, 20  
T
snap traces, buffer, 218  
SNMP  
tab completion, 18  
TCP statistics, 100, 101  
Telnet  
set and get access, 120  
SNMPv3 Access Table information, 28  
SNMPv3 Community Table information, 29  
SNMPv3 dump, 32  
requirements, 10  
telnet command, 16  
timeout, radius server, 115  
timeouts, idle connection, 12  
tnport, system option, 112  
trace buffer, 218  
SNMPv3 Group Table information, 29  
SNMPv3 Information Menu, 26  
SNMPv3 Notify Table information, 31  
SNMPv3 Target Address Table information, 30  
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table information, 30  
SNMPv3 USM User Table information, 27  
SNMPv3 View Table information, 27  
software  
traceroute command, 16  
Tracking  
VRRP  
tracking, 184  
transmit flow control, 133  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)  
PUT and GET commands, 207  
use for updating switch software image, 211  
typographical conventions, 13  
image, 211  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)  
bridge parameters, 145  
information, 42  
port cost option, 147  
U
port priority option, 147  
root bridge, 145  
UCB statistics, 101  
UDP statistics, 93  
switch reset effect, 214  
unscheduled system dump, 223  
upgrade, switch software, 211  
user access control configuration, 125  
user access levels, 11  
uuencode flash dump, 222  
with trunk groups, 48  
sshport, 114  
starting switch setup, 19  
state (STP information), 43, 45, 47  
statistics dump, 107  
V
Statistics Menu, 72  
verbose n command, 16  
view pending configuration changes, 109  
virtual router  
subnet address mask configuration, IP subnet address,  
159  
subnets  
description, 184  
IP interface, 159  
switch  
tracking criteria, 185  
virtual router group  
reset, 214  
Index 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VRRP priority tracking, 187  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)  
password, authentication  
VRRP authentication, 188  
group options (prio)  
virtual router  
port configuration, 131  
VLANs  
ARP entry information, 53  
configuration, 152  
information, 49  
name, 49  
priority, 187  
port membership, 49  
setting default number (PVID), 131  
tagging, 25, 70  
priority election for the virtual router, 185  
virtual routers  
increasing priority level of, 185  
master preemption (preem)  
virtual router, 187  
VLAN number, 49  
VRID (virtual router ID), 184, 187  
VRRP  
master preemption (prio)  
virtual router, 185  
master advertisements, 185  
VRRP configuration, 183  
VRRP information, 62  
VRRP master advertisements  
time interval, 187  
VLAN  
active port  
VLAN, 188  
VLAN tagging  
VRRP statistics menu, 98  
Index 228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Car Seat PD247311A User Manual
Graco Car Seat PD265359A User Manual
Grizzly Brush Cutter C2314 C2317 User Manual
Grizzly Nail Gun H2913 User Manual
GSW Water Heater Electric Water Heater P N 61515 REV G 05 03 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Air Cleaner 98904 User Manual
Hearth and Home Technologies Ventilation Hood TS345 User Manual
Hotpoint Oven SE103PGX User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Hardware 69731B User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Server A9834 9001B User Manual